JP2017184784A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine equipped with means enabling determination of how much ball entrance efficiency to each winning port among a plurality of winning ports is obtained.SOLUTION: A pachinko game machine includes ball entrance determination means capable of detecting ball entrances of game balls to each winning port among a plurality of winning ports, and ball entrance state information generation means for generating ball entrance state information which is information based on the ball entrance state of game balls to the plurality of winning ports, based on a detection result detected by the ball entrance determination means. The pachinko game machine is further configured such that if a power interruption occurs in a state in which the ball entrance state information is being held, the ball entrance state information can be held even after a restoration from the power interruption.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 17

Description

  It relates to pachinko machines.

  As a recent pachinko game machine, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, The mainstream is pachinko gaming machines that transition to the state and can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface to obtain a large number of prize balls. In addition, pachinko machines that can win prize balls when a game ball enters a winning opening such as a starting opening on a game board surface (game area) have become mainstream.

Actual climbing 3022063 JP 2013-165859 A

  However, due to the fact that the angle of the game nail changes due to the collision of the game balls flowing down the game board surface (game area), the efficiency of entering the game balls into a certain prize opening is assumed at the time of shipment of the game machine. In some cases, there is a problem that it is not possible to determine the degree of the entrance efficiency for each winning opening.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, a first winning port) through which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters the ball Grand Prize Winner C10, Second Grand Prize Winner C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, entry state display device J10),
Detection of game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (for example, main gaming starting port A10, second main gaming starting port B10, general winning port P10, first major winning port C10, second major winning port C20) Possible entry determination means (for example, entry determination means MJ10);
Based on the detection result detected by the entrance determination means (for example, the entrance determination means MJ10), the plurality of prize winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, Entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) for generating entry state information, which is information based on the state of entry of game balls into the first grand prize opening C10 and the second grand prize opening C20) With
A pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to retain the entry status information even after a power failure occurs in a situation where the entry status information is retained, and after returning from the power failure. It is.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to determine how much the ball entry efficiency for each winning opening is.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a unit configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an operation diagram relating to the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start-entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game starting entrance entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) big winning opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the process of detecting a general winning opening entrance on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of out-entry ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the number-of-entry determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of prize ball payout command transmission control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is an image diagram relating to a prize ball payout command and payout related information on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the payout control board side main process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of detection of a payout motor operation abnormality on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of payout abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of ball path abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of detecting a payout motor abnormality on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of a payout stop abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception processing (vs. main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of prize ball payout control processing (at the start of prize ball payout / motor drive start) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor driving / at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout control process (during motor drive) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the motor error process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of error notification execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of discharged ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the award ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the base determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of main game start-entry ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of a general winning opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the base determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 67 is a memory map configuration diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 68 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 69 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the award ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a maintenance mode execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 76 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of main game start-entry ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of a general winning opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the number-of-balls determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the main game start-entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of a general winning opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 85 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the base determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of backup execution control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the main game start-in entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of a general winning opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the number-of-entry determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the main game discharge number confirmation process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the secondary game entry ball confirmation process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the sub game entry ball determination process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the sub game side discharge number confirmation process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the RAM clear backup process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 104 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the award ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of discharged ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the entering state calculation process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 109 is an entry information backup image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a display example of the ball entry state display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 111 is an arrangement example of the main game start opening and the general winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 112 is a table 1 showing a configuration related to information related to entering, applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 113 is a table 2 showing a configuration relating to information related to entering a ball, applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 114 is a table 3 showing a configuration related to information related to a ball entry applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, for example, numbers, letters, designs. The thing with the shape of etc. can be mentioned. In this specification, “identification information” may be called a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (design), but the “special symbol (special symbol)” is the main control board. The “decoration pattern (drawing)” is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board S side. “Displaying identification information” is not limited to a display method. For example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only whether light is emitted but also a color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Direction” refers to display content that enhances the fun of the game. For example, identification information fluctuates / stops, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photos, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following condition, the advance state = easy-to-win state and the evacuation state = non-easy-to-win state. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. “Entry status display” is a display of information related to entrance, display of the number of entrances to a predetermined entrance, display of the number of award balls paid out based on entrance to a predetermined entrance, multiple Display of the total number of entrances to the entrance of the game, display of the number of prize balls paid out based on the entrance to multiple entrances, display of the base value, display of the base value in a predetermined gaming state, entrance rate Display of a pitch ratio in a predetermined gaming state, a display of an accessory ratio, a display of a continuous accessory ratio, a display of the total number of discharged balls, and the like. “Predetermined operation on the operation member” means that the sub input button is pressed (in this example, it is determined that the button is pressed once when it is turned off → on for 0.5 seconds or less and then turned off). Press the button for a long time (in this example, it is determined that the button has been pressed for a long time when it is turned on for 10 seconds or longer), and press the RAM clear button (in this example, it is turned off for 0.5 seconds or less. → It is determined that the button has been pressed once when it is turned off), and the RAM clear button is pressed for a long time (in this example, it is determined that the button has been pressed for a long time when it is turned off for 10 seconds or more) , Operation of the firing handle, etc. The “operable operation member provided on the back side of the gaming machine” is a member provided on the back side that is not visible when the player is playing, for example, a RAM clear button. . The “operable operation member provided on the front side of the gaming machine” is a member provided on the front side that is visible when the player is playing, for example, a sub input button, a launch handle .

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example for one embodiment is a modification example from another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, It should be understood that a combination of one modification and the other modification is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. Furthermore, numerical values (for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each gaming state, etc.) as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications are as follows: This is merely an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, according to the condition of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the condition of the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game, by the time shortening game and non- It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in the conditions for time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the magnitude relationship between the winning probability at the time of the lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is as follows: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be changed as appropriate so that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side, etc. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring based on the intention that the probability variation gaming state will continue until the next jackpot occurs, whether to set “65535” as the number of continuations (configure to continue substantially), Or, even in the options of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next jackpot occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples Should be understood as appropriate.

  Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Pachinko gaming machines are roughly divided into a gaming machine frame D and a gaming board Da, and the gaming machine frame D and the gaming board Da are each formed by assembling a plurality of units. Hereinafter, each unit constituting the gaming machine frame D and the game board Da will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame D of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame unit D12, a front frame unit D14, a transparent plate unit (or glass unit) D16, a door unit (or glass door) D18, and a ball tray unit D17. (The upper ball dish D20, the lower ball dish D22, and the firing handle D44 are collectively referred to as D17).

  The outer frame unit D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it is to be installed, and the upper, lower, left, and right frame fences (upper frame collar D12d, lower frame collar D12e, left frame collar D12a, right frame collar D12b). The curtain plate D12c is assembled in a frame shape as a unit. Here, a pair of upper and lower front frame hinges D12a-1 for assembling the front frame unit D14 is fixed to the left frame rod D12a, and an outer frame for locking the front frame unit D14 is fixed to the right frame rod D12b. A frame side locking bracket (not shown) is fixed. In the present embodiment, the speaker D24 capable of outputting sound according to the gaming state is disposed on the curtain plate D12c, and the left and right frame rods (the left frame rod D12a and the right frame rod D12b) are vertically The frame frame (upper frame frame D12d, lower frame frame D12e) is made of wood, and the curtain plate D12c is made of resin.

  The front frame unit D14 is a frame whose outer size is aligned with the opening of the outer frame unit D12. A hinge mechanism D14a-1 (corresponding to them) provided at an appropriate position of the frame unit D14 and a locking device (not shown) are attached to the outer frame unit D12 so that it can be opened and closed laterally and locked.

  The front frame unit D14 includes a launching mechanism for launching a game ball, a game board housing mechanism for detachably housing the game board Da, a prize ball payout mechanism for giving a prize ball, A game-completed ball discharge mechanism or the like for collection is provided. In the present embodiment, a base frame body D14a that forms a base and forms a game board accommodation mechanism and has a launch mechanism attached thereto, and is detachably attached to the front frame body D14a. A front frame unit D14 is formed from the back mechanism unit D14b in which the mechanism is formed. Further, a pair of upper and lower glass frame hinges D14a-2 for assembling a door unit D18, which will be described later, is provided on the left side of the front frame body D14a. A glass frame locking device (not shown) for locking is provided. Further, a ball tray unit support mechanism (including a ball tray hinge D14a-3) for assembling a ball tray unit D17, which will be described later, is provided below the front frame body D14a.

  The transparent plate unit D16 is for holding a plurality of (for example, two) transparent plates D16a such as glass and acrylic plates in parallel with a predetermined interval (about 20 mm). After glass is inserted into a glass holding portion (not shown) formed on the one member D16b, a second member D16c that shields the insertion portion is fitted and adhered to be integrated. The transparent plate unit D16 (particularly, the transparent plate D16a) can see through the game area D30 of the game board Da through an opening surface of the door unit D18 described later, and foreign matter does not enter from the opening surface (this It is difficult to access the game board Da and the game area D30 from the opening surface.

  The door unit (glass door) D18 is provided at an appropriate position of the glass frame hinge D14a-2 and the glass frame locking device (not shown) provided in the front frame unit D14 and the door unit D18 (corresponding to these). It is attached to the front frame unit D14 so that it can be opened and closed laterally and locked by a hinge mechanism and a locking metal fitting (not shown). The door unit D18 is configured to have an outer size substantially matching the outer shape of the game board Da, and an opening D18a is provided in the center with an area smaller than that of the transparent plate unit D16. A game board Da and a game area D30, which will be described later, are visible through D16.

The door unit D18 has a transparent plate unit holding portion D18b for holding the transparent plate unit D16 on the back side thereof, and a decorative portion that is decorated around the opening D18a so as to obtain an electric decoration effect and a visual effect. D18c and the like are also formed. In the present embodiment, a frame decoration lamp D18-L is disposed at the upper right part of the door unit D18. In addition, you may comprise so that the information which concerns on the entering ball mentioned later may be displayed by lighting of the frame decoration lamp D18-L.
Details of the component configuration and the like of the door unit D18 will be described later.

  The ball tray unit D17 includes a ball tray unit support mechanism (including a ball tray hinge D14a-3) provided in the front frame unit D14 and an engagement member (for example, an engagement member) provided at an appropriate position of the ball tray unit D17. The joint member D17a-1) is detachably attached to the front frame unit D14. The ball tray unit D17 can be detached from the front frame unit D14 only when the door unit D18 is opened and closed, so that the ball tray unit D17 can be removed in a state where it is used for gaming without providing a dedicated key for the gaming machine. A difficult structure (for example, a structure in which a part of the door unit D18 and a part of the ball tray unit D17 wrap) is employed.

  The ball tray unit D17 has an outer size formed in a square shape, an upper ball tray D20 for supplying game balls to the launching device at the upper portion, and a large number of prize balls at the lower portion. When an excessive amount of game balls is supplied to D20, a lower ball tray D22 capable of storing the excess game balls is formed. On the right side of the lower ball plate D22, the launch intensity (game) A firing handle D44 for adjusting the ball hitting position) is provided. Further, on a part of the surface of the ball tray unit D17 (in this example, the upper surface of the upper ball tray D20), a sub input button SB operated by the player at the time of production, a lending operation unit for making a lending request for the game ball ( (Not shown) is provided. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22. Details of the component configuration of the ball tray unit D17 will be described later.

  Although the schematic configuration of the gaming machine frame D in the present embodiment is as described above, as described above, the gaming machine frame D is composed of a plurality of units, and more specifically, the front of the outer frame unit D12. The front frame unit D14 (including the game board Da), and the transparent plate unit D16, the door unit D18, and the ball tray unit D17 are configured to be detachable (or openable / closable) in front of the front frame unit D14. For this reason, the alignment part of each unit has a minute gap for facilitating the opening / closing operation and the attaching / detaching operation. Therefore, in this embodiment, although not shown in the drawings, the alignment portion of each unit has a labyrinth structure (uneven shape in a cross-sectional view) so that the gap does not become linear in order to prevent foreign matter from entering. It is desirable to employ a structure such that (but not limited to).

  In the present embodiment, the door unit D18 and the ball tray unit D17 adopt a separate structure, but both may adopt an integral structure. Further, in the present embodiment, a structure in which a physical game medium is paid out according to the game result is adopted. However, electronic medium management may be performed. In that case, the lower ball tray D22, the prize ball payout mechanism, etc. are not required, and a game machine form (so-called enclosed circulation form) in which a game-completed ball is returned to the upper ball dish D20 to perform electronic management is adopted. It will be supplemented that an operation unit for settlement / rental using an electronic medium is arranged in the dish unit D17 or the door unit D18.

  Next, a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34 is formed in the game board Da. The game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, a general winning port P10, The big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, the production display device SG, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, the center decoration D38 and the out mouth C80. is set up. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  First, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is in a closed state where a game ball cannot enter the second main game start opening B10 {a ball receiving member formed in a flat plate shape (hereinafter referred to as a ball receiving member). ) Withdrawn from the game area D30} and an open state in which a game ball can enter (a state in which the ball receiving member protrudes into the game area D30). Here, as the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d in the present embodiment, an electric accessory (so-called “velo electric”) in which the ball receiving portion slides back and forth is adopted, and when it is in the open state, the game The game ball is received by the ball receiving member protruding into the region D30, and the game ball is guided to the second ball detection device B11s (arranged inside the game board). Further, in the present embodiment, as the electric combination, an electric combination in which the ball receiving member slides back and forth is adopted so that it is difficult to receive the game ball in the opening operation in a short time. There is no limitation, and so-called tulip-type electric accessories that can take a closed state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the closed state may be adopted. .

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided apart from each other, and flow down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured to be easily guided to the first main game start opening A10, but difficult to be guided to the second main game start opening B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is not easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is easily guided to the second main game start port B10. . It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are spaced apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 The two main game start ports B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other. In that case, the upper portion of the second main game start port B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game start port A10. May be.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Next, the general winning opening P10 includes a general winning opening entering device P11s. The general winning opening entrance detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the general winning opening P10, and generates general winning opening entrance information indicating the entering at the time of entering. Note that a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls are paid out as prize balls by entering the game balls into the general winning opening P10. A plurality of general winning openings P10 are provided, and a game ball that flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and a game ball that flows down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) Are easy to enter the general winning opening P10. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the number of the general winning opening P10 is changed. Only the game balls that flow down the standard) may be easy to enter.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (reference to the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the right side of the game area D30 (reference to the center of the game area). ) Is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10 (but not limited to this, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) May be configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10}.

  Next, a first big prize opening C10 and a second big prize opening C20 are provided above the out mouth C80 (in particular, the right side of the game area D30), and the right side of the game area D30 (in the middle of the game area). The game balls flowing down the standard) are configured to easily pass through the area where the first grand prize winning opening C10 and the second big winning prize opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening C80.

  Next, the first grand prize winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped by the big hit symbol, and is an out port. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above C80 (in particular, the right side of the game area D30). Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1) The first prize winning solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state in which a bar-like member provided in the big prize opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side) The slide-type attacker has a box-shaped member that can receive a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down the game area D30. The prize-winning mouth is closed due to obstruction of the acceptance of the game ball into the box, and when it is in the retracted state, the prize-winning mouth is open by allowing the reception of the game ball into the box-shaped member This is suitable for the case where it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. The winning opening corresponding to the main game is located above the opening C80 (in particular, the right side of the game area D30). Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening C20 are configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d has the second big prize opening C20 in the second big prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Variable (exciting and changing the second big prize opening solenoid C23). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state in which a bar-like member provided in the big prize opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side) The slide-type attacker has a box-shaped member that can receive a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down the game area D30. The prize-winning mouth is closed due to obstruction of the acceptance of the game ball into the box, and when it is in the retracted state, the prize-winning mouth is open by allowing the reception of the game ball into the box-shaped member This is suitable for the case where it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of lose. {However, it is not limited to this. A 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique that does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) by giving the first main gaming symbol (second main gaming symbol) itself an effect role, an effect described later You may comprise so that a 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display like display apparatus SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in a game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like. In addition, you may comprise so that the information which concerns on the below-mentioned entry may be displayed by lighting of the game effect lamp | ramp D26.

  Next, the entry state display device J10 has the state of the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the general winning port P10 {non-probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game This is a display device that displays information on whether the state of entry in the state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game short time flag is off) is normal or abnormal. In addition, if the game situation is abnormal, the game nail that guides the game ball to flow down toward the general prize opening P10 is bent in a direction different from that at the time of shipment of the gaming machine. Even if it keeps firing a game ball towards it, it is difficult to enter, etc. In the present embodiment, the ratio of the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 and the game ball that has entered the general winning port P10 is outside the assumed range. It is comprised so that it may determine with it being abnormal. Further, although details will be described later, the elements that can be displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 are not limited to those described above. Various values such as a value obtained by multiplying the value obtained by dividing the total number of shot balls by 100 are described in detail later).

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, an error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs and notifies the occurrence of the error, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a prize to each prize opening In accordance with the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball payout device (set base) KE including the prize ball payout unit KE10 for paying out the game balls to the upper ball tray D20 and the payout operation by the prize ball payout unit KE10 are controlled. A prize ball payout control board KH, an error indicator KH3 for displaying an error occurrence state (for example, 7-segment display), an error release switch KH3a for releasing a predetermined error, and an upper ball tray D20 Launching device D42 that launches each game ball (reserved ball) into the game area D30, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and a power supply unit that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine E and a power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine, are provided on the rear surface of the front frame unit D14 (opposite the game side).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and the operating principle for paying out the game balls will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 4, the winning ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (stepping motor) KE10m that is driven at the time of payout. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 4, the winning ball payout unit KE10 includes a sprocket KE10p connected to a stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters the winning opening in the game area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and sends a signal of the winning ball to the winning ball payout control board KH To do. Alternatively, a ball lending request is made from the game ball lending device such as the card unit R to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes the payout of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 5, when the stepping motor KE10m rotates, the sprocket KE10p (the member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2 and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) rotates, and the game ball is rotated. One ball is paid out. Also, the paid-out game balls are detected by a payout count sensor KE10s provided continuously downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. As for the cross section CC, it is supplemented that a cross section along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easily visible) is illustrated as shown.

  The lower part of FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a rotor position confirmation sensor (dispensing motor position sensor) KE10 ms and a rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (an example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photosensor that has a pair of measurement units and detects an object between the measurement units by projecting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measuring units are a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and is arranged with the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 interposed therebetween. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 has six concave portions formed along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit. When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light projecting part and the light receiving part, it is turned on (the lower state in FIG. 4).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during games and computer programs read from ROM, etc.) handled by, and a backup area (and power supply for backup) for holding information when power is interrupted ing.

  Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined. First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1 grand prize winning prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize winning prize winning detection device C21s, general winning prize entrance ball detecting device P11s}, drive solenoid (not shown) (first grand prize winning solenoid C13, second grand prize mentioned above) Game peripheral devices (first main game peripheral device A and second main game peripheral device B in the figure) such as mouth solenoid C23), information display LED (not shown), etc. The first and second main game shared peripheral device C and the auxiliary game peripheral device H) are electrically connected, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 6, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. The main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information via the external relay terminal board G (output to the hall computer HC side). One-way communication).

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball lending request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. The game ball lending device R (card unit R) for transmission is connected. Although not shown, in this embodiment, the control circuit unit (launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launching apparatus D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, as described above, the sub-control board S is an effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols and the like, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown, but a so-called effect). For example, a motor / solenoid of a movable body accessory. In addition, by executing a predetermined operation (long pressing or pressing), the sub input button SB can be used to start or end measurement of a base value, execute a predetermined effect, or start display of a maintenance mode. Is also connected to the sub-control board S. Moreover, it can determine with sub input button SB having been operated by detecting sub input button detection apparatus SBs. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) Control of lighting of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured to be In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that noise is mixed in the space merit and the wiring etc. by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, the flow path of the game sphere used for the game will be described with reference to the flow path image diagram of the game sphere in the lower part of FIG. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the game balls launched into the game area D30 are the entrance holes {first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10, first major winning port C10, first The ball enters any of the two major winning openings C20, the general winning opening P10, and the out opening C80}, and is guided to the inside of the gaming machine (inside the gaming machine frame D) through the entering sensors corresponding to the respective winning openings . Here, the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 passes through the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2 provided for fraud detection. Thereafter, all the game balls guided into the gaming machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s and are discharged out of the gaming machine. Although not specifically shown in this example, a switch for confirming the entrance {each entrance (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, the first major winning port C10, the first A game ball that has entered the two major winning openings C20, the general winning opening), and has one or a plurality of switches that are different from the switches for detecting the entering into each of the winning openings} It shall be.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. The sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) includes a sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), frame decoration lamps D18-L, The speaker D24 and the like are also electrically connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub-main control part SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. are data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each means included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  First, the main control board M has a game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of games such as special games and specific games. A game progress means MP for managing the game, a game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing information relating to the game state, and the fraud detection information management means ME (and The fraud related information temporary storage means MEb) for temporarily storing information related to error detection and fraud detection, and the state of entry into various entrances, or the state of entrance into various entrances Maintenance mode control means MO that controls display and various game information {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 16R large size) on the game peripheral device side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) Information transmission control means MT for transmitting 8R big hit, 4R big hit, losing}, information on fluctuation mode (for example, fluctuation time), special game start signal / status information / end signal, hold information, etc.} A command transmission buffer MT10 for accumulating unsent commands, an external signal output control means MG for outputting information relating to the game to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G, and game balls to various winning holes And a prize ball payout determining means MH for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on the winning.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the entrance determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls to each entrance (starting opening, etc.), and the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each starting port during the variable display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the entrance determination means MJ10 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start port A10 (and the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2). Determining means MJ11-A, second main game start opening entrance determining means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the second main game start opening B10, and a game ball in the auxiliary game start opening H10 Auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11-H for determining whether or not a game has entered, and a first grand entrance entrance determination to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the first major entrance C10 Means MJ11-C10 and whether or not a game ball has entered the second grand prize opening C20, whether or not a game ball has entered the second big prize mouth entry judgment means MJ11-C20 and the general prize opening P10 General winning entry entrance judging means MJ11-P for judging whether or not, and the exit It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered (detected discharge) the out-entry ball entry determination means MJ11-C80, which determines whether or not a game ball has entered 80, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s. Total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 (and a total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 that counts the number of incoming balls) and temporary information related to the entry for temporarily storing information related to entering the entrance Enter the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 in the storage means MJ10b and in a specific situation (for example, a specific game state such as a non-stochastic game state and a non-time-reduced game state, etc.) The starting entrance entrance number counter MJ12c that measures the number of played balls and the general winning entrance P10 in a specific situation (for example, a specific game state such as a non-stochastic game state and a non-time-reduced game state, etc.) Entered the ball It has a generally ball entrance counter MJ13c for measuring the number of tricks sphere, the.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the game ball entering the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result, To first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, first winning random number, first variation mode determining random number, first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and second main game starting port B10 And determining whether or not to acquire the second main game random number based on the incoming game ball, and depending on the determination result, the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main random number, A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring a game symbol determination random number and the like, and an auxiliary game random number for determining whether or not the auxiliary game side random number can be acquired and acquiring the random number based on the determination result Acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H That.

  Here, the “random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above is “0” to “65535” or “ It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 and the hold digest control means MJ31 for controlling the processing related to the hold digest and the fluctuation start, and the first main game random number obtained in a situation where the change permission of the first main game symbol is not given. Is stored temporarily in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until permission to change the first main game symbol is granted based on the determination result. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main game random number acquired in a situation where the main game symbol holding means MJ32-A and the second main game symbol variation permission is not given, and based on the determination result The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding random numbers in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the second main game symbol change permission is lowered, and the auxiliary game symbol change permission is Going down It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the auxiliary game side random number acquired in the situation where there is not, and based on the determination result, the random number is held in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the change permission of the auxiliary game symbol is granted Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for performing the game.

  Here, the pending digest control means MJ31 has a change start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not a condition for starting change is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store a maximum of four, and combine the random numbers with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporarily storing in the form Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN draws a stop symbol for each symbol based on each random number and a random determination means MN10 for lottery whether or not to shift to the special game and whether or not the second main game start opening electrical accessory B11d is open. Symbol content determining means MN40 for determining, and variation mode determining means MN50 for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on each random number. Here, the success / failure lottery means MN10 is a first main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-A that performs a success / failure lottery on the first main game symbol, and a second main game winner / rejection lottery unit that performs a success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B, and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for making a winning / losing lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the success / failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbol. The first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing the success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol on / off lottery Each of which has an auxiliary gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 and the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number) and the acquisition Based on the determined game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the determination. The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H which is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol. The table MN41ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the variation mode determination unit MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first primary game random number). MN 51-A and second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), And auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state. The second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (for example, normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time shortening game → auxiliary game time shortening lottery table. ).

  Next, the display control means MP10 performs a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling to stop display after changing the first main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are assisted for a predetermined time. Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling to stop and display after changing the game symbol is provided.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a zero / clearable first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (for example, a decrement counter that is subtracted at predetermined intervals). Hereinafter, those similar to timers can be mounted with the same counter). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening / closing the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is satisfied. The second main game start port electric player opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B and the second main game start port electric player opening timer MP22t for measuring the driving (opening) time of the second main game start port electric player B11d -B and the game ball remaining in the second main game start port electric accessory B11d after the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is closed are detected by the second main game start port entrance detecting device B11s. And a second main game start opening entrance waiting timer MP22t2, which measures the time to wait until

  Next, when the special game control means MP30 satisfies the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the special game transfer condition, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) are determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the mouth C10 or the second grand prize port C20 in a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first grand prize port) Special game time management means MP34 for performing the opening / closing time of C10 and the second big prize opening C20), and distribution game execution control means MP36 for executing the distribution game. Here, the special game executing means MP33 includes first and second prize winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first prize winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second prize winning opening electric accessory C21d. , A winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 is provided. The special game time management means MP34 includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time, an opening timer MP34t2 for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening, and the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20). The game balls remaining in the first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) after the closing are detected by the first big prize opening prize detection device C11s (or the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s). It further has a special winning opening entrance waiting timer MP34t3 that measures the time to wait until the game is completed. The special game content determination means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table) The details of are not shown, but are a table in which the open prize opening, the maximum number of rounds, the execution contents of one round, etc. are determined, and the first round is executed after the special game is started The start demo time, which is the waiting time until the game is played, the end demo time, which is the wait time from the end of the final round to the end of the special game, and the like are also predetermined in this table).

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the probability variation end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition for the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition for the time-reduced game state is satisfied. It has a short time end condition determination means MP52 for determination. Each has a short time counter MP52c capable of counting the short time. Here, the probability variation gaming state means a gaming state in which the winning probability at the time of winning or failing the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol is higher than the non-stochastic variation gaming state, and the time shortening gaming state Means that the average value of the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is shorter than the non-time-reduced game state, and / or the second main game start opening electric accessory per unit time It means a gaming state in which the ease of opening B11d is improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the auxiliary game symbol becomes a winning symbol with a high probability, and the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively prolonged ( Opening time extension function). Also, the time-reduced game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes of the first main game symbol and the number of times of change of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability variation game with no time limit restriction). except for). That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol fluctuate (stop). Note that the probability variation end condition determination means MP51 and the short time end condition determination means MP52 perform, for example, a lottery to shift from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time the symbol changes. It may have a function (in the case of a pachinko game machine having a so-called falling lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). First and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, on / off of various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB20b and the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C are stopped according to the first or second main game symbol that is currently changing (the first or second main game symbol that satisfies the change start condition). There are first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

  Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game symbol information for temporarily storing information such as stop symbols related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbols (auxiliary game symbols for which the change start condition is satisfied). Means MB11b-H.

  Next, the prize ball payout determining means MH sends and receives payout information transmission / reception means MHsj (and transmission / reception) for sending and receiving information relating to the prize ball payout (and error detection and fraud detection) with the prize ball payout control board KH side. A payout command temporary storage means MHsjb) for temporarily storing the received information, a prize ball number counter MHc for counting the total number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls, and the prize ball payout has not been completed (prize ball payout) Unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb for temporarily storing information relating to unpaid prize balls (which has not received information relating to the completion of withdrawal from the control board KH side).

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the fluctuation of the decoration pattern in a form synchronized in time with the fluctuation of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have. As for the first main game start opening A10, the first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s for detecting the entry into the first main game start opening A10, and the entry is a normal entry. And a first main game start opening confirmation sensor A11s2 for confirming whether or not there is an entry at any of the entrances (especially only at the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s). Is detected, a process related to an illegal act or an error occurrence is executed (details will be described later). When two balls are used to double check the entrance, use sensors with different detection mechanisms (for example, non-contact type photo sensor and contact type physical switch). However, it is suitable for detecting fraud.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second winning prize opening C20, a general winning opening P10 from which a game ball is paid out when a game ball wins, and a ball entry state display device capable of executing a display regarding the state of entry to various entry holes J10, an out port C80 for taking a game ball that has not entered the start port or winning port of the game balls launched into the game area D30 into the gaming machine, and the start port, the entrance port, and the out port C80. A total discharge confirmation sensor C90s that is provided on a path for discharging the game ball taken into the game machine to the outside of the game machine and detects the game ball discharged from the game machine.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes the auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of receiving

  Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, effect content determination processing and display control processing for effect display. Effect display control means SM20 for controlling the error, error notification control means SM30 for controlling error notification when an error occurs, and information transmission / reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereafter, each said means is explained in full detail.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has main-side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information related to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the decorative pattern variation mode and stop symbol determination processing and display control processing, and the decorative symbol display control processing that holds the decorative symbol hold count management and hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, background effect display control means SM23 for determining background image determination processing and display control processing, notice effect display control means SM24 for controlling determination effect display processing and display control processing, and reach effect content And reach effect display control means SM25 for managing the determination process and the display control process.

  Next, the error notification control means SM30 has an error occurrence determination means SM31 for determining whether or not an error has occurred.

  Here, the decorative design display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the display design content determination means SM21n for determining the stop design and the variation mode of the decorative design, and the decorative design display variation SM21n. The drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and the drawing variation time management timer SM21t for timing the variation time of the decorative symbols; ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n further includes a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). (Not shown).

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to the hold related to the decorative design.

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23 is displayed based on the information from the main control board M side, and the background effect (in this example, it is displayed on the back of the decorative symbol, and the possibility of executing the special game based on the information regarding the hold) Background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of the effect), and background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for temporarily storing information related to the background effect display.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 is displayed based on the information from the main control board M side, and is displayed during the notice effect (in this example, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the expected degree of transition to the special game in the change) In order to temporarily store the information related to the notice effect display and the notice effect display content determining means SM24n for determining the display content, display timing, etc. of the effect that suggests / informs the feasibility of the special game based on the information related to the hold. The notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25, based on the information from the main control board M side, reaches the reach state (mainly during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the reach state by the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed This is an effect that is executed after the fact that it has been notified, but it also includes an effect that is executed in conjunction with the change display of the decorative symbol even if it does not reach the reach state) Reach effect display content determining means SM25n to be determined, and reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing information related to reach effect display.

  Next, the effect display means (sub-sub control part) SS displays an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG and the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control part SM side. Display control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information relating to various image displays.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 includes a decoration symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decoration symbol, and a first hold display portion SG12 (and a second hold display portion SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the initial setting is performed (not shown, but the register initialization, the input / output port setting, etc. are performed), and then in step 1002, the main control board M displays the RAM clear button. Whether the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by a game hall manager or the like. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up to the RAM in Step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in Step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (the command may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and described later. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the regular interrupt period T (for example, hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 2000, the main control board M executes a ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 1100, the main control board M executes a later-described auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, at step 1500, the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, at step 2100, the main control board M executes the number-of-entries determination process described later. Next, in step 1900, the main control board M executes fraud detection information management processing. Next, in step 1950, the main control board M executes an error management process described later. Next, in step 3000, the main control board M executes a prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to the external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.) described later. Next, in step 1990, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side) and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being performed.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the incoming ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, in step 2150, the ball entry determination means executes an auxiliary game start port ball entry detection process to be described later. Next, at step 2200, the incoming ball judging means executes a main game start opening incoming ball detection process which will be described later. Next, at step 2350, the ball entry determination means executes a first (second) big winning opening entrance ball detection process which will be described later. Next, in step 2400, the entry determination means executes a general winning opening entry detection process to be described later. Next, in step 2500, the ball entry determination means executes a discharge ball detection process to be described later. Next, at step 2600, the incoming ball judging means executes an out mouth incoming ball detecting process to be described later. Next, in step 2700, the pitch determination means executes a prize ball determination process which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1100).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start-entry ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the auxiliary game start port entry determining means MJ11-H refers to the flag area of the entry related temporary information storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11-H determines that the input from the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is the entrance detection time (above this time, the auxiliary game start port When the entrance detection device H11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (the time it is considered that there is an entrance to the auxiliary game start port H10). In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the auxiliary game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2158, the auxiliary game start port entry determining means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related temporary information storage means MJ10b, and performs the next processing ( The process proceeds to step 2200).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152, in step 2160, the auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11-H detects that the input from the auxiliary game start port entrance detecting device H11s is the detection end time (the auxiliary game start is more than the time). If the entrance ball detection device H11s has not detected an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for a time period that is considered to have been passed through the auxiliary game start entrance ball entrance detection device H11s. In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2154 or step 2160, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game start entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in Step 2202, the first main game start port entry determining means MJ11-A refers to the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the first main game start port detection continuation flag is off. judge. In the case of Yes in Step 2202, in Step 2204, the first main game start entrance entrance determining means MJ11-A receives the input from the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s as the entrance detection time (above that time, When the first main game start port entrance detection device A11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the first main game start port A10s is ON for a time period when it is considered that a first main game start port A10 has entered a ball. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the first main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-A turns on the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in Step 2210, the first main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game start entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related temporary information storage means MJ10b. .

  Next, in Step 2212-1, the first main game start entrance ball judging means MJ11-A determines that the current game state is a non-stochastic variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state (the main game probability change flag is OFF and the main game It is determined whether or not the time flag is off. Note that the case of the non-time-reduced gaming state may be the case where the main game short time flag is off, or the case where the auxiliary game short time flag is off (when the opening extension function of the electric accessory is not activated). In addition, the time-saving game state may be the case where the main game short time flag is turned on, or the case where the auxiliary game time short flag is turned on (when the opening extension function of the electric accessory is activated). In the case of Yes in step 2212-1, in step 2212-2, the first main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-A is not currently executing a special game (condition device operation flag is OFF). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2212-2, in step 2212-3, the first main game start opening entrance judging means MJ11-A adds 1 to the counter value of the start entrance entrance number counter MJ12c (increment). 2222.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2213, the input from the number-of-entries counter MJ10c is detected time (when the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s has not detected the input for the time or more, It is determined whether or not the ball is OFF for more than the time that the ball has passed through the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s. Next, in Step 2214, the first main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, in step 2215, the first main game start opening entry determining means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start opening long time detection flag in the flag area of the entry related temporary information storage means MJ10b. Then, the process proceeds to step 2222. Note that if the result is No in step 2204, step 2212-1, step 2212-2, or step 2213, the process proceeds to step 2222.

  Next, in Step 2222, the second main game start port entry determining means MJ11-B refers to the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and whether or not the second main game start port detection continuation flag is off. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-B receives the input from the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s as the entrance detection time (above that time, When the second main game start port entrance detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the second main game start port B10s is ON for a time period when it is considered that the second main game start port B10 has entered the ball. In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the second main game start opening entry judging means MJ11-B refers to the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the second main game start opening valid period flag is on. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the second main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, in step 2230, the second main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related temporary information storage means MJ10b. .

  Next, at step 2231-1, the second main game start entrance ball judging means MJ 11 -B determines that the current game state is a non-stochastic variation game state and a non-time-reduced game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game It is determined whether or not the time flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2231-1, in step 2231-2, whether or not the second main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-B is not currently executing a special game (conditional device operation flag is OFF). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2231-2, in step 2231-3, the second main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-B adds 1 to the counter value of the start entrance entrance number counter MJ12c (increment). 2240. As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game short time flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (condition device) When the operation flag is OFF), when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10, 1 is added to the counter value of the start port entrance number counter MJ12c It is configured.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (when the entrance of a game ball is detected during the period when the entrance to the second main game start opening B10 is not valid), in step 2232, the second main game start entrance entrance determination The means MJ11-B determines that there is an illegal entry at the second main game start opening B10, and sets a second main game start opening illegal entry command (command to the sub-control board S side). Step 2240 Migrate to Note that if the result is No in Step 2231-1, Step 2231-2, or Step 2224, the process proceeds to Step 2240.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2222, in step 2233, the second main game start entrance entrance determining means MJ11-B detects that the input from the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is the detection time (above that time, If the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s has not detected an input, whether or not the game ball has passed through the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s is OFF for more than judge. In the case of Yes in step 2233, in step 2234, the second main game start port entry determining means MJ11-B is the second main game start port detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn off. Next, in Step 2238, the second main game start port entrance judging means MJ11-B turns off the second main game start port long time detection flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The process proceeds to step 2240. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2233, the process proceeds to Step 2240.

  Next, in step 2240, the first main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-A (second main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-B) is the first main game start entrance entrance detecting device A11s (first (2) The main game start entrance ball entry detection device B11s) is ON for more than the fraud detection time (the time that exceeds the time detected as a normal entry and is determined to be fraud). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the first main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-A (second main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-B) is stored in the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) main game start port long-time detection flag in the flag area is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2350). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2240, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2350).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) special winning opening entrance detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (second big prize entrance entrance judging means MJ11-C20) refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and It is determined whether or not the 1 (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag is OFF. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (second big prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C20) is the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s (first Whether the input from the two major winning opening detection devices (C21s) is ON for at least the ball detection time (the time when the ball detection device detects an input when the ball detection device detects an input) or longer. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2355, the first big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C20) refers to the incoming related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Then, it is determined whether or not the flag during the first (second) big winning opening is valid. In the case of Yes in step 2355, in step 2356, the first big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C10 (the second big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the incoming related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn on the first (second) big prize winning ball entrance flag. Next, at step 2360, the first big winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second big winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20) is in the flag area of the incoming related information temporary storing means MJ10b. The first (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2370.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2355 (when a game ball is detected during a period in which entry into the big winning opening is not valid), in step 2361, the first big winning opening entry judging means MJ11-C10 ( The second grand prize opening entry determining means MJ11-C20) determines that there is an illegal entry in the big prize opening, and the first (second) big prize opening illegal entry command (to the sub-control board S side). Command) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2370. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2354, the process proceeds to step 2320.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2352, in step 2362, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (second big prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C20) is the first grand prize opening prize detecting device C11s. When the input from the (second grand prize winning prize detection device C21s) is detected time {when the time is equal to or longer than the first big prize winning prize winning detection device C11s (second big prize winning prize winning detection device C21s) Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time when it is considered that the game ball has passed through the first grand prize winning prize detection device C11s (second big prize winning prize winning detection device C21s). In the case of Yes in step 2362, in step 2364, the first big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C10 (the second big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the incoming related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) big prize opening detection continuation flag inside is turned off. Next, at step 2368, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (the second grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C20) is in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The 1 (second) special winning opening long time detection flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2370.

  Next, at step 2370, the first grand prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 (second big prize opening entrance judging means MJ11-C20) is the first grand prize opening prize detecting device C11s (second grand prize opening). When the input from the winning detection device C21s) is fraud detection time {over the time, the first grand prize winning prize detection device C11s (second big winning prize winning detection device C21s) detects the input, the first big winning mouth C10 It is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that an illegal entry to (second big prize opening C20) is detected}. In the case of Yes in step 2370, in step 2372, the first big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C20) The first (second) big prize opening long-time detection flag inside is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2370, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the general winning opening entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. Note that the general winning opening P10 is a entrance that pays out a winning ball when a gaming ball enters, but does not affect the progress of the game, and is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball. A winning entry ball detecting device P11s is provided. Further, the winning entry determination means MJ10 has general winning entry entrance determination means P11s for determining whether or not there is an entry to the general winning opening.

  First, in step 2402, the general winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-P refers to the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is OFF. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the general winning entrance entrance determining means MJ11-P determines that the input from the general winning entrance entrance detecting device is the entrance detection time (the above-mentioned time, the general winning entrance entrance detecting device). When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (the time it is considered that there is a ball in the general winning opening). In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the general winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-P turns on the general winning opening entrance flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2410, the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-P turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2411-1, the general winning opening entry determining means MJ 11 -P determines that the current gaming state is a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming short time flag is It is determined whether or not it is off. In the case of Yes in step 2411-1, in step 2411-2, the general winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-P determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is OFF). To do. In the case of Yes in step 2411-2, in step 2411-3, the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ 11 -P adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ 13 c and proceeds to step 2420. . On the other hand, if NO in step 2402, in step 2412, the general winning entrance entrance determining means MJ11-P receives the input from the general winning entrance entrance detecting device for the entrance detection time (over the time, the entrance to the general winning entrance) If the detection device does not detect an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time that it is considered that the game ball has passed the general winning opening entrance ball detection device. In the case of Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the general winning opening entry determining means MJ11-P turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2418, the general winning opening entry determining means turns off the general winning opening long time detection flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2420. Note that if the answer is No in step 2404, steps 2411-1, 2411-2, or step 2412, the process proceeds to step 2420. As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game short time flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (condition device) In the case where the operation flag is off), when a game ball enters the general winning opening P10, 1 is added to the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ13c.

  Next, in step 2420, the general winning entrance entrance determining means MJ11-P detects that the input from the general winning entrance entrance detecting device is an illegal detection time {over the time, the general winning entrance entrance detecting device detects the input. In this case, it is determined whether or not the time is equal to or longer than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the general winning opening is detected. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the general winning opening entry determining means MJ11-P turns on the general winning opening long time detection flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and next (Step 2500). Even in the case of No in step 2420, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the total discharged ball confirmation unit MJ11-C90 refers to the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage unit MJ10b, and determines whether or not the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 determines that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is the ball entry detection time (if the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for the time or more, the total It is determined whether or not the discharge confirmation sensor C90s is ON for a period of time that is considered as having entered the ball. In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506, the total discharged ball confirmation unit MJ11-C90 turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. Next, in step 2508, the total discharge ball check means MJ11-C90 adds (increments) 1 to the total discharge check number counter MJ11c-C90, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2600 processing).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 detects that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is the detection end time (the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for the time or longer). If not, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time that it is considered that the game ball has passed the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s. In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the total discharged ball confirmation unit MJ11-C90 turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. Next, in step 2514, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns off the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag in the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and performs the next process (process in step 2600). ). Note that if the answer is No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of out-entry ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the out-entry ball determining unit MJ11-C80 refers to the in-ball related information temporary storage unit MJ10b and determines whether or not the out-port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the out-entry entrance determination unit MJ11 -C80 determines that the input from the out-entry entrance detection device C80s is the ingress detection time (the out-entry entrance detection device C80s When an input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for a time period when it is considered that a ball has entered the outlet C80. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the out-entry ball entering determination means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the in-ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the processing in step 2620 Migrate to

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2602, in step 2610, the out-entry ball determination unit MJ11 -C80 determines that the input from the out-entry ball detection device C80s is the detection end time (exceeding the time, the out-entry ball detection device C80s). If no input is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (which is regarded as the completion of passing through the out-entry ball detection device C80s). In the case of Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the out-entry entrance determination unit MJ11-C80 turns off the out-entry detection continuation flag in the flag area of the ingress-related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. Next, in step 2615, the out-entry ball entering determination means MJ11-C80 turns off the out-out port long time detection flag in the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process proceeds to step 2620.

  Next, at step 2620, the out-entry ball determining means MJ11-C80 detects that the input from the out-entry ball detecting device C80s is the fraud detection time (the out-entry ball detecting device C80s detects the input for the time or longer. If it is determined that it is ON for more than the time during which it is considered that an illegal entry to the outlet C80 is performed. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the out-entry ball entering determination means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-entry long time detection flag in the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the next processing The process proceeds to (Step 2700). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, at step 2702, the winning ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the winning ball payout determining means MH adds the winning ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting port A10 to the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc. to add. Next, at step 2708, the prize ball payout determining means MH pays the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb to information indicating that the prize ball related to the first main game start opening A10 is paid out (for example, the number of prize ball payouts). Information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2712. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2702, the process proceeds to step 2712.

  Next, at step 2712, the winning ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the incoming ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the winning ball payout determining means MH adds the winning ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting port B10 to the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc. to add. Next, in step 2718, the prize ball payout determining means MH pays the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb to information indicating that the prize balls related to the second main game start opening B10 are paid out (for example, the number of prize ball payouts). Information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to Step 2722. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2722.

  Next, at step 2722, the winning ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the entering related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first (second) big winning opening entrance ball flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the winning ball payout determining means MH turns off the first (second) big winning opening entrance flag in the flag area of the entering related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, in step 2724, the winning ball payout determining means MH adds the winning ball payout number (13 in this example) relating to the first big winning port C10 (second big winning port C20) to the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc. ) Is added. Next, at step 2728, the prize ball payout determining means MH pays out the prize balls related to the first big prize opening C10 (second big prize opening C20) to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. (For example, information relating to the number of prize balls paid out) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2722, the process proceeds to step 2732.

  Next, at step 2732, the winning ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the general winning opening entrance flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the winning ball payout determination means MH turns off the general winning opening entrance flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, at step 2734, the winning ball payout determining means MH adds the winning ball payout number (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the prize ball payout determining means MH pays out the prize balls related to the general winning opening to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb (for example, information related to the number of prize ball payouts). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1100). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2732, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1100). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out at the first main game start opening A10 and the number of prize balls paid out at the second main game start opening B10 are the same three balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may change the number of prize balls paid out. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls paid out at the first main game start opening A10 may be changed to 4 balls, and in such a case, the number of prize balls paid out at the second main game start opening B10. May be 1 to 3 balls less than the number of prize balls paid out at the first main game start opening A10.

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start entrance ball judging unit MJ11-H refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage unit MJ10b and judges whether or not the auxiliary game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the auxiliary game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether or not the number of hold balls is not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). . In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number together with information on how many pieces are held, in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when it is No in step 1102 and step 1104, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessory releasing flag is off. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and holds the ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of the auxiliary gaming short time flag). In addition to the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game short time flag When is turned on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, there are “D0, D1, D2” as the stop symbols, and “D1, D2” as the stop symbols as the winning symbols. In the non-time-reduced game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the open mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed), and the open mode of the electric combination that will be opened is stopped. When the symbol is “D1, D2,” the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed). In the time-saving game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the release mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed). When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → close). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol “D0” during non-time-reduced games, and the stop symbol is likely to be a winning symbol “D1” during time-reduced games.

  Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H determines the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game short flag is on and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game short flag is off) is set. In step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary gaming symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the auxiliary game symbol variation display on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H to determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. In step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H.

  Next, in step 1230, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “hit” (D1 · D2 in this example). Determine. In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B is based on the winning design and game state on the auxiliary game side, and the release mode (for example, in the time shortening game) In the case of the winning symbol “D1”, it is opened for 1 second → closed for 1 second → opened for 1 second → closed for 1 second → opened for 1 second → opened in the case of hitting symbol “D2”. Second opening, 0.8 second closing, and 5 second opening mode), and the second main game starting port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B has a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening and closing time) of the electric accessory. Set. Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory releasing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B starts the second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B, and then the second main game start port electric accessory opening combination. Open the object B11d. Next, at step 1238, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B is a second main game start port effective period flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1242.

  Next, in step 1242, the second main game start port electric player opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric player opening timer MP22t-B, and determines the electric player's opening time. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric combination B11d and temporarily turns the auxiliary game state temporarily. The electric-operated article releasing flag in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off. Next, in step 1248, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B adds an electric accessory entry ball waiting time (in this example, 3) to the second main game start port entrance wait timer MP22t2. Set seconds) and start. Next, in Step 1250, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the second main game start port entrance waiting timer MP22t2, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1250, in step 1252, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B is in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, the second main game start port The validity period flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300). Thus, in this example, the effective period of the second main game start opening (the period during which the second main game start opening effective period flag is on) is the opening timing of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d. From the time until the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is closed, the electric component entry waiting time (in this example, 3 seconds) elapses, and the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is closed. However, it is configured to be able to wait for a game ball to enter for an amount equivalent to the waiting time for entering the electric accessory.

  In the case of No in Step 1202, the process proceeds to Step 1242, in the case of No in Step 1204, the process proceeds to Step 1224, and in the case of No in Step 1206, Step 1224, Step 1230, Step 1240 or Step 1250. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance entry determining means MJ11-A refers to the flag area of the entry related temporary information storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the first main game start flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and holds on the main game (especially the first main game side). It is determined whether or not the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1306, in step 1308, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning lottery random number for determining the success / failure, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1310, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1312, the hold control means MJ30 sets the information (holding occurrence command) related to the acquired first main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM (step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process), and the process proceeds to Step 1322. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1302 or step 1306, the process proceeds to step 1322.

  Next, in Step 1322, the second main game start entrance entry determining means MJ11-B refers to the flag area of the entry related temporary information storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the second main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-B turns off the second main game start flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 1326, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and holds on the main game (especially the second main game side). It is determined whether or not the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1326, in step 1328, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired in the same manner as the first main game content determination random number. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the random determination random number for the first main game and the random determination random number for the second main game) Are set to the same range. Next, in Step 1330, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1332, the hold control means MJ30 sets the information (holding occurrence command) related to the acquired second main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1400) also in the case of No in Step 1322 or Step 1326.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digest control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the pending digest control means MJ31 determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being played (or the condition device is being operated), the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is displayed), during the variable fixed time, You may comprise so that it may not satisfy | fill.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digest control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation that is temporarily stored is read and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding digestion process). Next, at step 1410-1, the success / failure lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state. Based on 1 main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, a winning lottery random number), a main game symbol winning lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability variation gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, the hit (so-called small hit) where the gaming state cannot be changed is not illustrated, but a small hit may be generated (winning for the small hit).

  Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determining means MN41-A (second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) makes the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game). With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbol is determined based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “4A, 5A, 7A” and “4B, 5B, 7B”) are selected. One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lose symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. When the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the state and the selection rate of the variation mode and / or the selection rate of the main game symbol are different from those before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

  Next, in Step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) draws the first main game variation mode determination lottery corresponding to each game state. Refer to the table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly the variation The main game symbol variation mode is determined based on the mode lottery random number), temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1415.

  Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, the present embodiment is configured such that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result and the main game short time flag state. That is, when the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result is a win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game short flag is on (relative to the short game state) The variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, it is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but needless to say, it may be configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. Absent. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol on the second main game side When the change is configured to be advantageous for the player, the second main game side is likely to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished}.

  Next, in step 1415, the game content determination means MN determines the commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) relating to the main game symbols temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Change mode information, etc.) and a command (symbol change display start instruction command) related to the current gaming state are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission processing in step 1990) Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the main game symbol variation display is started in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control goes to step 1420.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and changes. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that the symbol variation has ended (the symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( The change display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display part B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as the fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, in step 1424, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns off the changing flag in the flag area of the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, at step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No at step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

  Next, at step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500). Even in the case of No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, at step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1458, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction count) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1458, in step 1460 and step 1462, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. (Step 1500). In addition, also when No is determined in Step 1452, Step 1454, or Step 1458, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the accessory continuous action device operation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1503, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1503, in step 1504, the special game control means MP30 determines the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, in step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1600). Note that if the answer is No in step 1502 or 1503, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the accessory continuous action device operation flag is off. . In the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the special game control means MP30 turns on the accessory continuous action device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1610, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( The control command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1990), and the process proceeds to step 1614.

  Next, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1614, that is, when it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1616, the special game execution means MP33 is set to the release pattern set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (for example, keeps releasing). Open pattern and open / close pattern). Next, in step 1618, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1622, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big prize opening electric combination C11d (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d) and the first big prize opening C10 (or the second large prize opening). The winning opening C20) is opened, and a special game timer MP34t (particularly, an opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and started. Next, in step 1623, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the flag during the first (second) big prize opening validity period in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 1624. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1614, that is, when the big prize opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1624 without performing the processing of steps 1616 to 1623.

  Next, in step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current round number, game ball winning number, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Next, in step 1625, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the waiting-in-game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1625, in step 1626, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, the predetermined number of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20). It is determined whether there are (for example, 10 balls) winning balls. If Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1626, in step 1627, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer) and the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) relating to the special prize opening is determined. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1627, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1627, the process returns to the caller of this subroutine.

  Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 sets the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). The process of stopping the driving and closing the first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) (the process related to closing is executed in this process, but actually transmitting a control command to the device) Is executed in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Next, in step 1629, the special game executing means MP33 starts by setting the big winning opening entrance waiting time (3 seconds in this example) to the big winning entrance entrance waiting timer MP34t3. Next, in step 1630, the special game executing means MP33 turns on the waiting-in-game flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1631. Note that if the answer is No in step 1625, the process proceeds to step 1631.

  Next, in step 1631, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the big winning opening entrance waiting timer and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1631, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the waiting-in-game flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the flag during the first (second) big prize opening validity period in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1634, the special game executing means MP33 resets the release timer MP34t2. Next, in step 1635, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1638, in step 1640, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the accessory continuous action device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1642, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1644, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) to end the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1990). In step 1700, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900). It should be noted that even if No in Step 1602, Step 1631, or Step 1638, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, at step 1702, the specific game control means MP50 determines that the stopped jackpot symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (the main game symbol that becomes a probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game. In this example, 5A / 5B / 7A / 7B ). In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1708. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1702, in Step 1706, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) to the counter value of the hour / minute number counter MP52c, and proceeds to Step 1708. Next, in step 1708 and step 1710, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next processing (step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the number-of-entry determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the maintenance control means MO executes an addition process of the counter value of the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c and the counter value of the general ball number counter MJ13c, and calculates the total number of balls G. Next, in Step 2104, the maintenance control means MO determines whether or not the total number of entered balls G calculated in Step 2102 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (100 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2104, in step 2106, the maintenance control means MO calculates “starting entrance ball number counter value / general ball number counter value” as the ball entering ratio N. Next, in step 2108, the maintenance control means MO determines whether or not the entrance ratio N calculated in step 2106 is within a predetermined range (in this example, 1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4). In the case of Yes in Step 2108, in Step 2110, the maintenance control means MO displays a normal display (for example, “00” is displayed) on the entrance state display device J10, and proceeds to Step 2114. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2108, in step 2112, the maintenance control means MO displays an abnormal display (for example, “01” is displayed) on the entering state display device J 10, and proceeds to step 2114. Next, in step 2114, the maintenance control means MO clears the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c and the general entrance number counter MJ13c to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2104, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1900). Thus, in this embodiment, every time the total number of game balls that have entered the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the general winning port P10 reaches 100, the first main game start port A10. The entrance ratio N between the total number of game balls that have entered the game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 and the game balls that have entered the general winning opening P10 is calculated. Depending on whether or not it is in a normal range (in this example, “1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4”), the display executed by the ball entry state display device J10 is made different.

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraud radio sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraud radio sensor is ON continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). The purpose of this process is to eliminate the influence of noise by determining whether or not a predetermined number of interrupts are continuously ON. In the following, the process in FIG. The case of “continuous for a predetermined number of times” has the same purpose). In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that an illegal radio wave has been detected, turns on the illegal radio wave detection flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb, Control goes to step 1912. On the other hand, if NO in step 1902, in step 1906, fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraud sensor, and determines whether or not the input from the fraud sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of fraudulent radio waves has ended, and turns off the fraud detection flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1912. Note that if the result of Step 1906 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1912.

  Next, in step 1912, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in Step 1912, in Step 1914, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that fraud magnetism has been detected, turns on the fraud magnetism detection flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb, Control goes to step 1922. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1912, in step 1916, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is continuously OFF a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of fraud magnetism has ended, and turns off the fraud magnetism detection flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1922. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1916, the process proceeds to Step 1922.

  Next, in step 1922, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is ON continuously for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns on the door open flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Step 1932 follows. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1922, in step 1926, fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1926, the fraud detection information management means ME determines in step 1928 that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns off the door open flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Step 1932 follows. Note that if the answer is No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

  Next, in step 1932, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been released and turns on the open frame flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1934. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1932, in step 1936, the fraud detection information management unit ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been released, and turns off the open frame flag in the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1950). Even in the case of No in step 1936, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1950).

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of error management processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the error management means determines whether or not an error occurrence condition has been satisfied (for errors that may occur and control when an error occurs, see FIGS. 73 and 74). In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the error management means transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) that an error has occurred and error type information (by the control command transmission process in step 1990). Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1956, the error management means determines whether or not the error cancellation condition is satisfied (see also FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 for the error cancellation condition and the control at the time of error cancellation). In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the error management means transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) related to the information that the error has been released (sub-command by the control command transmission process in step 1990). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3000). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3000) also in the case of No in step 1952 or step 1956.

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of prize ball payout command transmission control processing according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes a payout control board transmission control process to be described later. Next, at step 3200, the main control board M executes a payout control board reception control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 31 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3105, the payout information transmitting / receiving means MHsj refers to the input port of the second line (a line for transmitting an ON / OFF signal relating to whether or not a prize ball is being paid out), and whether or not the payout signal is OFF. That is, it is determined whether or not a payout is not currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb, and issues an unpaid prize ball (still prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side). It is determined whether there is a prize ball that has not been transmitted. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb, and a prize ball payout related error (it is an error that is inappropriate for paying a prize ball) ( For example, it is determined whether or not an error relating to a failure of the payout motor, a full upper tray, a ball running out error, or the like has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj corresponds to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the current payout process is executed, which is temporarily stored in the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. Prize ball payout commands (see FIG. 32) corresponding to the number of prize ball payouts set are set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb. In step 3125, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj deletes the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the currently set prize ball payout command from the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb and shifts the subsequent information. Execute. Next, in step 3130, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj transmits the prize ball payout command set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb to the prize ball payout control board KH side for the next process (the payout control board in step 3200). (Receive control processing). Note that, also in the case of No in step 3105, step 3110, and step 3115, the process proceeds to the next process (conversion payout control board reception control process in step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information transmitted / received between main control board / payout control board >>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the present embodiment includes specific information indicating that it is a prize ball payout command and information on the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed to 1001 (identification information indicating that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls. For example, 0 (0000B) means 0 prize balls and 15 (1111A) means 15 prize balls. .

  Next, the payout related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M side will be described. Here, as an example, the payout related information (award ball payout related information or payout abnormality related information) is a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, pan full error and prize ball payout completion information. The details of each error will be described later. If the bit corresponding to each error is “0”, it means that the error has not occurred. If it is “1”, the error has occurred. Means that has occurred. Bit 0 relates to the completion of prize ball payout, “0” means that the prize ball has been paid out, and “1” means that the prize ball has not been paid out.

  Next, FIG. 33 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. First, in step 3205, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb and determines whether or not payout related information has been received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the fraud detection information management means ME has error information (out of ball error, upper tray full error, other payout related errors) in the received payout related information. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb and turns on the error flag relating to the corresponding error, thereby paying out a prize ball. Error information on the control board KH side is also managed (unified management) on the main control board M side. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3210, in step 3220, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb and sets an error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Turn off. In step 3225, the payout information transmitting / receiving means MHsj determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout related information. In the case of Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj clears the prize ball payout command (the prize ball payout command relating to the completion of the current payout) set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb. The process proceeds to (the process of step 3500). It should be noted that, also in the case of No in step 3205 and step 3225, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3502, the external signal output control means MG refers to the gaming state temporary storage means MB and confirms the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3504, the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and sends it to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output through the external relay terminal board G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the same figure (image diagram of signal output). The external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal portions to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information relating to award ball payout, information relating to winning or symbol stop, current gaming state (normal gaming state, Error information for outputting various error information detected by the opening detection sensor when the door is opened, the terminal for gaming state information output for outputting information on specific gaming state, special gaming state, etc.) Output terminals and the like} are provided. As will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are configured to be capable of outputting information from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC by being connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout related information, which is information output from the winning ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal that outputs a signal during a big hit at the time of a big hit (a plurality of jacks depending on the type of the big hit ), A door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a start opening winning output terminal that outputs a signal when winning at the starting opening, and a shortage of balls in the prize ball tank KT Game-related information, which is important information for game hall operators, such as a terminal for outputting a signal when the ball is out and a terminal for outputting a special symbol when outputting a signal when the special symbol is stopped. This is an output terminal. That is, the output terminal for the payout related information is set as one output terminal, so that it is possible to avoid the exhaustion of the output terminals for these important game related information.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. Yes. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

  Here, the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, between the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board. G and Hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is constituted by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. I don't mean. That is, an electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is ON / OFF) by the unit, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. When the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, whereby the output terminal and the hall computer HC are brought into conduction. In addition, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the output terminal and the hall computer HC are not electrically connected by returning the contact portion G2 to the open state. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G can be obtained by detecting the conduction period. With this configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote operation goto) that illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing the go-to action, but is not limited to this, for example, a pair of light emitting units and A photo sensor having a light receiving unit is also configured to enable one-way communication (for example, light from a light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by a hall computer HC). It is supplemented that the signal can be received by reading with the unit.

  However, since the structure is once replaced with a physical signal (switch state is ON / OFF), the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC with one of the external relay terminal boards G. It is difficult to transmit complex information using an input / output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, an output terminal for the number of special symbol determination times, It is customary to configure such that “only information indicating that one variation of a special symbol has ended” can be transmitted).

  Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process described later with the main control board M. Next, in step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting a prize ball payout / starting motor driving), which will be described later. Next, in step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor driving and at the end of prize ball payout), which will be described later. Next, in step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive execution) described later. In step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a motor error process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 4100.

  Here, referring to the block diagram on the right side of the figure, the prize ball payout control board KH of the gaming machine in this embodiment controls the transmission and reception of commands and information with the main control board M side, the card unit R side, and the like. Transmission / reception control means 3100 for controlling the game, error control means 3200 for executing an error control related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of game balls upon receiving the prize ball payout command or the lending command Payout control means 3300 for executing the payout process. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the transmission / reception control unit 3100 transmits information to the main control board M and the card unit R, and the reception control unit 3110 that controls reception of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R. Transmission control means 3120 for controlling the control.

  Here, the reception control unit 3110 further includes a main-side reception control unit 3111 that controls reception of information (for example, commands) from the main control board M. The main-side reception control unit 3111 further includes a main-side reception information temporary storage unit 3111a in which information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. The transmission control unit 3120 further includes a payout-related error information temporary storage unit 3121 that temporarily stores error information related to a payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side.

  Next, the error control means 3200 detects an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing an on / off state of an error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a payout motor operation abnormality is detected. Error control means 3230 when detecting a payout motor operation abnormality that controls error control at the time, error control means 3240 when detecting a payout abnormality that controls error control when a payout abnormality is detected, and error when a ball path abnormality is detected Error control means 3250 for detecting a ball path abnormality detecting control, error control means 3260 for detecting a payout motor abnormality detecting error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality relating to a prize ball payout operation is detected. Error control means 3270 at the time of payout stop abnormality detection that controls the error control at the time of being played and a ball biting error of the prize ball payout unit KE10 occurs A ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t for managing the error notification period, and a non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 for managing the error notification period when a non-passing error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs. Yes. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 further includes an unauthorized payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times the discharge motor operation abnormality is detected. Further, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 further includes an excessive payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of excessive prize balls. The ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further includes a payout interval extension control means 3251 for executing a payout interval time extension process related to prize ball payout. The payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further includes a retry operation control means 3261 for executing a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

  Next, the payout control means 3300 has payout process related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310 is a payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 for temporarily storing a state related to payout (for example, whether payout is being performed or whether a payout abnormality has occurred). The payout counter 3312 in which the number of game balls to be paid out is set during the payout process, the step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven by the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. In this case, the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the excited stator, and a predetermined time (waiting for ball passing) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation) Sphere passing waiting timer 3315 for measuring time / motor stop time) and payout by unit payout operation A unit payout counter 3317 which game balls speed is set can further have. Here, in this embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrementing timer and is configured to stop when the timer value reaches 0, but is not limited thereto, and is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure using a timer. Hereinafter, each subroutine will be described in detail.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4100 in FIG. First, in step 4110, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of detecting a dispensing motor operation abnormality, which will be described later. Next, in step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes a payout abnormality detection error control process to be described later. Next, in step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes a ball path abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes a payout motor abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of detecting a required payout stop abnormality, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process in step 4200).

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of detecting a dispensing motor operation abnormality according to the subroutine of step 4110 in FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of occurrences of an abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality described later is detected, and to flag an error when the number of occurrences of the abnormality exceeds a threshold. Is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passing of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s in a situation where the prize ball payout process is not executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. It is a flag that is turned on in the case of failure (dispensing motor operation abnormality). In the case of Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 increments the counter value of the unauthorized payout accumulation counter 3231 by one. Next, at step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the counter value of the illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). To do. If Yes in step 4114, the payout motor operation error detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4115, and the process proceeds to step 4116. Note that if the result is No in step 4111 or step 4114, the process proceeds to step 4116.

  Next, at step 4116, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 sets the payout motor operation error in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 as the payout related error information, and performs the following processing ( Then, the process proceeds to step 4120 (error control process at the time of dispensing abnormality detection). Even in the case of No in step 4116, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of dispensing abnormality detection in step 4120).

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of payout abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4120 in FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of payouts of excessive game balls due to the abnormality when a payout abnormality described later is detected, and when the count number exceeds a threshold value, It is to turn on a flag indicating that an error has occurred. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout abnormality detection flag exceeds the predetermined number of award balls paid out based on the command transmitted from the main control board M side, and the payout of excessive game balls is detected (payout). It is a flag that is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the error control means 3240 at the time of abnormality in detecting the withdrawal acquires the excessive payout number temporarily stored in the payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310, and the excessive payout number is stored in the excessive payout cumulative counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excess payout cumulative counter 3241 and determines whether or not the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. In the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4125, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 turns on the excessive payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4126. Note that if the result of Step 4121 or Step 4124 is No, the process proceeds to Step 4126. Note that the excessive payout error (the state where the excessive payout error flag is on) is configured to be resolved only by turning on the power again, but this example is merely an example, and is not limited thereto. For example, the error may be eliminated by pressing an error release switch or elapse of a predetermined time.

  Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excessive payout error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 sets the excessive payout error as the payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 and performs the next processing (in step 4140). The process proceeds to error control processing when a ball path abnormality is detected. Even in the case of No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4140 error control process at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality according to the subroutine of step 4140 in FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to detect an abnormal ball path, which will be described later. Or if an abnormality corresponding to a shortage of balls or a shortage of abnormalities is detected while investigating whether a small amount of game balls (shortage of balls) has occurred in the prize ball payout unit KE10 To turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error. In addition, (2) when an abnormality corresponding to a ball shortage abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is detected, the waiting time until the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is resolved by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout Is to create. First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag is at the end of execution of a predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) scheduled on the winning ball payout control board KH side, and the motor drive operates normally. This flag is turned on when a situation in which the payout is less than the predetermined number is detected under the situation where it is determined that the payout has been made. In the case of Yes in step 4141, in step 4142, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the occurrence condition of a ball break abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the occurrence condition of the ball breakage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is not particularly limited. For example, a detection sensor for a game ball is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10. An example of a condition where a ball breakage abnormality has occurred when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected, or a ball flow path directly above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball flow paths are provided) An example can be given in which a detection sensor for a game ball is provided for each of the “existence”, and when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, an abnormality of a shortage of balls has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4143, in step 4144, the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 turns on the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. Note that if the result of step 4141 or step 4143 is No, the process proceeds to step 4151.

  Next, in step 4151, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting the ball path abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4151, in step 4152, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not a condition for eliminating a ball break abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the conditions for eliminating the ball breakage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality are not particularly limited, and an example in which the abnormality is resolved when the occurrence condition of the above-mentioned ball breakage abnormality or ball shortage abnormality is not satisfied. Can be mentioned. In the case of Yes in step 4152, in step 4153, the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 turns off the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. In step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 determines the excitation timing during normal operation (for example, 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms to continuously excite a predetermined number of payout operations at one speed) or ball A passage waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (error control processing at the time of detection of a dispensing motor abnormality in step 4170). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4152, in step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 determines the excitation timing and the ball passing waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball is relatively low compared to the normal operation. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of detection of a dispensing motor abnormality in step 4170). Even in the case of No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of detection of a dispensing motor abnormality in step 4170). Here, the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited. For example, after a payout operation for one sphere is executed at a speed of 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is waited. An example can be given in which the excitation timing is changed so that the payout operation is executed once again at a speed of 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms after the waiting time has elapsed. Further, the waiting time for changing the ball passing is not particularly limited (for example, changing from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of detection of the dispensing motor abnormality according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a payout motor abnormality to be described later is detected, and to return to a retry operation of the payout motor (stepping motor KE10m in the winning ball payout unit KE10). It is to execute a switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to an external factor such as a ball bite. In the case of Yes in step 4171, in step 4172, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, at step 4173, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets the payout motor error as the payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121. Then, in step 4176, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Note that if the result of Step 4171 is No, the process proceeds to Step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting a retry operation in a standby state for a predetermined time after the occurrence of a motor error, which will be described later, and providing a waiting time for eliminating the motor error within the predetermined time.

  Next, at step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4177, in step 4178, the retry operation control unit 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4178, the retry operation control unit 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4179. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control unit 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as a step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage unit 3313. Here, the predetermined number of steps at the time of the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example in which the same number as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10 ms at the time of the retry operation described later can be given. Next, in step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control means 3261 switches the excitation method for the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, the well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) and the switching speed of one step for the retry operation (for example, 6 ms). Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) in the ball passage waiting timer 3315 as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control unit 3261 turns on the retry operation execution flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311. In step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and proceeds to the next processing (error control processing at the time of payout stop abnormality detection in step 4190). To do. Note that, also in the case of No in step 4177 or step 4178, the processing shifts to the next processing (error control processing at the time of payout stop abnormality detection in step 4190).

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of detecting a required payout stop abnormality according to the subroutine of step 4190 in FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and The award ball payout process cannot be continued until the abnormality is resolved. Here, the fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the winning ball payout process includes an abnormal communication between the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH, an abnormal communication between the card unit R and the winning ball payout control board KH, and payout. Examples include a sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s, a tray (upper plate) full tank abnormality, and the like. First, at step 4191-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of required payout stop abnormality detection sets an error continuation time (for example, 120 seconds) to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200 t and starts it, Control goes to step 4192-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection refers to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200 t and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of a required payout stop abnormality detection turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and in step 4192-1 Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4191-3, the process proceeds to step 4192-1.

  Next, at step 4192-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the switch non-passing error detection flag has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of a required payout stop abnormality detection sets an error duration (for example, 120 seconds) in the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2, and starts it. Control goes to step 4193-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, error control means 3270 upon detection of required payout stop abnormality refers to non-passing error occurrence timer 3200 t 2 to determine whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection turns off the switch non-passing error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4193-1 Migrate to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4192-3, the process proceeds to step 4193-1.

  Next, in Step 4193-1, the error control unit 3270 upon detection of required payout stop abnormality determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a has been pressed. In the case of Yes in step 4193-1, in step 4193-2 to step 4193-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection, the error-related flag ( For example, a payout motor operation error flag, a payout operation incomplete game ball detection flag, a payout motor error flag, and a switch non-passing error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4194-1. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

  Next, in step 4194-1, the required payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and proceeds to step 4195-1. . On the other hand, if No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection turns off the communication error flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

  Next, at step 4195-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 detects a sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or more). It is determined whether or not there has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, if the result of step 4195-1 is No, in step 4195-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4196- Move to 1.

  Next, at step 4196-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a required payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a tray (upper plate) full tank abnormality has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the error control means 3270 upon detection of the required payout stop abnormality turns on the pan full error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-3, the required payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 transmits a pan full command to the sub control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4196-1, in step 4196-4, error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection turns off the pan full error flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, at step 4196-5, the required payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 transmits a saucer full tank release command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1.

  Next, in Step 4197-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a card unit R connection abnormality is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage abnormality detection turns on the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4198-1. Migrate to On the other hand, if No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, error control means 3270 at the time of required stoppage stop abnormality detection turns off the CR unit unconnected error flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4198. Move to -1.

  Next, in step 4198-1, the error control means 3270 upon detection of a required payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and refers to a part of the error relating to the payout operation stop (for example, excessive payout error, prize ball device) It is determined whether all flags relating to error, payout motor operation error, game ball detection when payout operation is not completed, payout motor error, switch non-passing error) are off.

  In the case of Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the error control means 3270 upon detection of required payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 to refer to the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, the tray full tank. It is determined whether all error flags of the error flag and the CR unit unconnected error flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 executes a normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, a payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). Is temporarily stopped, the payout operation is resumed), and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4200). On the other hand, if No in Step 4198-1 or Step 4198-2, in Step 4198-4, the error control means 3270 upon detection of a required payout stop abnormality forcibly pauses the payout operation in the payout control means 3300, and the next The process proceeds to (the process of step 4200).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of prize ball payout related information reception processing (vs. main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 in FIG. Here, the first half of the flow is information reception processing from the main control board M (and processing for setting the number of prize balls to be paid), and the second half of the flow is information transmission processing to the main control board M. Accordingly, the information receiving process from the main control board M in the first half (and the process of setting the number of winning ball payouts associated therewith) will be described. First, in step 4205, the main side receiving control means 3111 is the payout state flag temporary storage means. Referring to 3311, it is determined whether or not the winning ball payout flag is off. Here, the “Prize ball paying out flag” means that when the pay ball paying process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in driving operation, or when the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time) This flag turns on when In the case of Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main side reception control means 3111 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a and determines whether or not a prize ball payout command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, at step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of payout balls to be paid this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main-side received information temporary storage means 3111a, The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). This completes the process of setting the number of prize balls to be paid when the normal prize ball payout process is executed. Note that the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225) also in the case of No in step 4205 and step 4210.

  Next, the process of transmitting information to the main control board M will be described. First, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 to determine whether or not the payout related error transmission flag is on. Determine. Here, the “payout-related error transmission flag” means that the above-mentioned payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. This flag is turned on and turned off after the error notification is given to the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4225, in step 4230, the error control means 3200 turns off the payout related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. In step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout-related error information set in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and proceeds to the next process (step 4240). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (step 4240) also in the case of No in step 4225.

  Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the “prize ball payout completion flag” is a flag that is turned on when it is determined by the payout control means 3300 that the prize ball payout has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 4240, in step 4245, the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the winning ball payout completion flag. In step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information indicating that the winning ball payout has been completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {the winning ball payout control process in step 4300 (the winning ball payout start).・ When starting motor drive}. Even in the case of No in step 4240, the process proceeds to the next process {award ball payout control process in step 4300 (at the start of a prize ball payout / motor drive)}. The winning ball payout completion information transmission process is thus completed.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the start of prize ball payout / motor drive start) according to the subroutine of step 4300 in FIG. Here, this process is a process before the execution of the motor driving process of the next step 4400, and the number of motor driving steps and the like are received in response to receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. It is a process to set. First, in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 in FIG. 42) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, in step 4310 and step 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to turn on the winning ball payout flag and turn off the winning ball payout start permission flag. To do.

  Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of award balls set in the payout counter 3312 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 3). In the case of Yes in step 4320, in step 4325, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that a predetermined number of payouts are paid, and the process proceeds to step 4332. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of winning ball payouts set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out. The process moves to 4332.

  Next, in step 4332, the payout control means 3300 sets the payout planned number in this unit payout operation (that is, the payout number planned in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j). Here, the excitation stator position specifying counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and “0” corresponds to the default position at the time of standby (pause). Next, in step 4337, the payout control means 3300 switches the normal operation excitation method (for example, the well-known 2-2 phase excitation method) related to the stepping motor operation and the normal operation one-step switching speed (for example, 3 ms). ) Is set. Next, in step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) in the ball passage waiting timer 3315 as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation. Next, in step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation execution flag. Here, the retry operation execution flag is a flag that is turned on during execution of the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation as described above. In step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and proceeds to the next process {the award ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / award). At the end of ball payout)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4305, in step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4345, since the motor has already been driven, the process proceeds to the next process {Step 4400 prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive completion / end of prize ball payout)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4345, in step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is OFF. Here, the winning ball payout continuation flag is after the stepping motor operation for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation, and when the winning ball payout operation should be continued when the ball passing waiting time / motor rest time elapses ( A detailed condition is described later. In the case of Yes in step 4350, the process proceeds to the next process {award ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor driving / end of a prize ball payout)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4350, in step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. In step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317 and determines whether or not the counter value exceeds 0 (that is, all payouts for the current payout operation have not been paid out). Or not). In the case of Yes in step 4354, in step 4356, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4354, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the winning ball payout continuation flag is ON, the process of setting the number of steps of motor driving and the like is executed again without receiving the winning ball payout command from the main control board M side. When it is determined that all of the scheduled payout amount due to the current unit payout operation has not been paid out, an occurrence of an abnormality that causes a ball shortage error or a ball shortage error is detected.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of prize ball payout control processing (at the end of motor driving / end of prize ball payout) according to the subroutine of step 4400 in FIG. Here, the process is an end process when the driving end of all the motors scheduled in the previous process (step 4300) is executed or when all the prize ball payouts are executed. . Here, motor drive end processing is executed from step 4402 to step 4419, game ball detection processing is executed from step 4420 to step 4425, and prize ball payout end processing is executed from step 4430 to step 4462.

  First, the motor drive end process will be described. First, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to determine whether or not the winning ball payout flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4405, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4405, in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 and determines whether or not the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. It is determined whether or not all the number of steps in the current unit payout operation set in step 4325 or step 4330 has been executed. If Yes in step 4410, in step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 in step 4417, turns off the retry operation execution flag, and proceeds to step 4418. On the other hand, if No in step 4416, the process proceeds to step 4418. Next, in step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the stepping motor in a paused state (in this example, the excitation output is lowered and the current excitation stator position specifying counter value (j) is continuously excited). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315, and proceeds to step 4420. Note that if the result is No in step 4405 or 4410, the process also proceeds to step 4420. This completes the motor drive end process.

  Next, the game ball detection process will be described. First, at step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a game ball detection signal is received from the payout count sensor KE10s. If Yes in step 4420, the payout control unit 3300 decrements the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317 by 1 in step 4422. Next, in step 4425, the payout control means 3300 decrements the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312 by 1 and proceeds to step 4430. Note that if the result is No in step 4420, the process proceeds to step 4430. In this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented (decremented) every time a ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In such a case, a value corresponding to the number of entered balls may be subtracted. This is the end of the game ball detection process.

  Next, the winning ball payout end process will be described. First, in step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes in step 4430, in step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4431 (that is, when the number of game balls related to the payout is detected by the sensor even though the driving of the motor related to the payout has not ended), in step 4432, The payout control means 3300 turns on the game ball detection flag at the time of payout incomplete in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to Step 4435. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4431, the process proceeds to step 4435.

  Next, in Step 4435 and Step 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to turn off the winning ball paying-out flag and turn on the winning ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than zero. In the case of Yes in step 4441, in step 4442, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and based on the count value, for example, if the counter value is “−3”, the excessive payout number is “3”. Is temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {award ball payout control process in step 4500 (during motor drive)}. In the case of No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and a predetermined payout number is normally paid out), the next process {the prize ball payout control process in step 4500) (During motor drive execution)}. In this example, the excess payout is detected when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the motor driving related to payout ends. Detection of excessive payout (value of payout counter 3312 is less than 0) when a predetermined time (for example, a sufficient detection waiting time until a game ball paid out by the driving is detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has elapsed. (I.e., an excess payout is an unexpected situation in which the number of game balls exceeding the number of game balls to be paid out has been paid out). This means that this unforeseen situation, which is extremely unlikely to occur by design, means that a malfunction has occurred in one of the payout mechanisms, or fraudulent activity has occurred during the payout operation. Done Likely it means the high thing).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4430, in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control means 3300 turns on the switch non-passing error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 (in this example, after the payout operation is completed, a predetermined value is set. Even if the ball passing waiting time has elapsed, if no game balls are detected for the number of game balls related to the payout operation, it is immediately determined that a switch non-passing error has occurred. The present invention is not limited, and it may be determined that a switch non-passing error has occurred when the event occurs a plurality of times).

  Next, in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs during motor driving as described above. In the case of Yes in step 4447, in step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process in step 4500 ( (When motor drive is executed)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4447, in step 4460 and step 4462, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311, turns off the retry operation execution standby flag, and sets the retry operation execution permission flag. It is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process {award ball payout control process in step 4500 (during motor drive)}. Even in the case of No in step 4445, the process proceeds to the next process {award ball payout control process in step 2400 (during motor drive)}.

  Here, in the case of No in step 4402 (that is, when the winning ball payout process is not being executed), in step 4470, whether or not the payout control means 3300 has received a game ball detection signal from the payout count sensor KE10s. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 4470, in step 4472, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to perform the next process {the prize ball payout control process (step 4500 ( (When motor drive is executed)}. Even in the case of No in step 4470, the process proceeds to the next process {award ball payout control process in step 4500 (during motor drive)}.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (during motor drive execution) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. Here, the process is a process of actually executing motor driving based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag that is turned on when a predetermined step counter number is set in the step counter temporary storage unit 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 43), and corresponds to the predetermined step counter number. This flag is turned off when all excitation is executed. Here, in the case of Yes in step 4505, in step 4510, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Next, at step 4520, the payout control means 3300 updates (increments by 1) the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excitation stator position specification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on a predetermined excitation method and switching speed. .

  Next, at step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation related to the motor operation (step-out phenomenon due to ball biting or the like) has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4530, in step 4550, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence or absence of a detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. In step 4555, the error control means 3200 determines whether the rotor is not rotating properly, that is, whether a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550. In the case of Yes in step 4555, in step 4560, the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and shifts to the next process (process at the time of motor error in step 4600). In the case of No in step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (motor error process in step 4600). In the case of No in step 4555, the error control means 3200 stores the error flag temporarily in step 4565. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (motor error process in step 4600).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the motor error process according to the subroutine of step 4600 in FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to forcibly shift the motor drive to a resting state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 of FIG. 45, it is detected whether or not the motor is present at the predetermined rotational position at a predetermined detection timing, and when the motor is not present at the predetermined rotational position, step out or the like is performed. This motor position abnormality flag is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 4605, in step 4610, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, in step 4615, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. In step 4620, the error control means 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 and proceeds to the next process (error detection error control process in step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time is no longer executed due to the occurrence of a motor error, and after the count value is cleared, the motor drive shifts to a pause state (step 4410 and step 44 in FIG. 44). 4415). Even in the case of No in step 4605, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100).

  Next, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 47 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the game machine is powered on. That is, when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, in step 5002, the sub-main control unit SM receives initial processing (for example, RAM clear information from the main control board M side) based on the information received from the main control board M side. In this case, the RAM on the sub control board S side is initialized, and when various information commands are received from the main control board M side, the production related information at the time of power interruption is set and restored, etc.) . Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (e) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM.

  Here, when (e) is executed, as shown in the process of (e) of the figure, first, in step 5100, the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs the hold information management process described later. Execute. Next, in step 5400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 5500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 5600, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 5700, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes an error notification execution process described later. Next, in step 5020, the sub game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes a display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side). The repetition processing routine is terminated.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (steps 5100 to 5700 and step 5020) is loop-processed after reset.

  Further, the process of FIG. 5F is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is sent to one terminal (in this example) of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM. , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (f). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the signal state from the STB signal line is turned on), in step 5004, the sub main control unit SM receives the signal from the main control board M side. Check the command input port (data signal line input port mentioned above). In step 5006, the sub main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process is restored.

  Next, the process of (g) of the same figure is a flowchart of the process at the time of power interruption at the time of power interruption signal reception from the power supply unit E, the main control board M, etc., for example. That is, when the power interruption signal is received, in step 5014, the sub-main control unit SM stores the game related information stored in the RAM in the save area. Next, in step 5016, the sub-main control unit SM starts supplying standby power to the save area. Next, in step 5018, the sub-main control unit SM prohibits execution of interrupt processing and shifts to a power interruption waiting loop. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and an area in which reserve power is automatically supplied even after power interruption is provided in the RAM (or a RAM in which reserve power is automatically supplied is provided), and game related information is stored in the area. You may comprise so that it may memorize | store.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 5100 in FIG. First, in step 5102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and receives a new hold occurrence command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the hold information relating to (1) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5102, in step 5104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, Add “1” to the maximum number of second main games. Next, in step 5106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold information (particularly, a random value related to the main game symbol lottery) based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side. The information is temporarily stored in the hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to Step 5116.

  On the other hand, if No in step 5102, has the drawing hold information display control means SM22 received the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 5108? Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 5108, in step 5110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 5112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 deletes the hold information related to the symbol variation from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and shifts the remaining hold information. Next, in step 5114, the sub game control means (sub main control part) SM accesses the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 5116. . Next, in step 5116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first hold display portion SG12 and the second hold display portion SG13). The same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value in the figure hold information temporary storage means SM22b are turned on and the process proceeds to the next process (step 5400). If step 5108 is No, the process proceeds to step 5116.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 5400 in FIG. First, in step 5402, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 5402, in step 5404, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5406, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b (symbol information ( Referring to the stop symbol / variation mode relating to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol If it is a flat eye such as “7, 7, 7” or a lost symbol, it will be “1, 3, 5”, etc.} and a variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short In the case of fluctuation, non-reach, in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined, and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related) Distribution temporary storage unit SM24b, temporarily stored in the reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b).

  Next, in step 5408, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 5500). Transition. In the case of No in step 5402, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5500).

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 5500 in FIG. First, in step 5502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5502, in step 5504, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 5506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5508, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 5510. Note that if the result is No in step 5502, the process proceeds to step 5510.

  Next, in step 5510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5510, in step 5511, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 checks the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5512, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the decorative symbol change start timing based on the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5512, in step 5514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). , Step 5530 follows.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5512, in step 5516, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5516, in step 5518, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). The process proceeds to step 5530.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5516, in step 5520, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25), the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5520, in step 5522, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) set the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 5020). At step 5530, and the process proceeds to step 5530. Note that if the result is No in Step 5520, the process proceeds to Step 5530.

  Next, in step 5530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game from the main control board M side). It is determined whether or not information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed has been received). In the case of Yes in step 5530, in step 5532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (deterministic display command) (transmits it to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). To do). Next, in step 5534, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5536, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (step 5600 processing). To do. In addition, also when it is No in step 5510 or step 5530, it transfers to the next process (process of step 5600).

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. First, in step 5602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 5602, in step 5604, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. To do. In the case of Yes in step 5604, in step 5606, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the big hit is the first hit (the big hit in the non-stochastic variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state). ) Is not determined. If Yes in step 5606, the process proceeds to step 5610. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5606 (in the case of the first hit), in step 5608, the background effect display control means SM23 resets the value of the extended number of times counter SM23c2 (zero clear) and proceeds to step 5610.

  Next, in step 5610, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 (increment) to the value of the consecutive resort number counter SM23c2. Next, in step 5612 and step 5614, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the big hit on the effect display device SG. Start display is performed (display is appropriately performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 5616. Note that if the answer is No in Step 5602, the process proceeds to Step 5616.

  Next, in step 5616, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side (gameability). Or based on the type of jackpot, etc.) Next, in step 5618, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the consecutive resort number counter SM23c2, and determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In the case of Yes in step 5618, in step 5620, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the big hit being executed is the maximum round big hit (for example, 16R big hit, 7A -It is determined whether it is a big hit (7B symbol). In the case of Yes in step 5620, in step 5622, the background effect display control means SM23 determines the ending effect {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total number of balls earned at the time of consecutive games, and the specification of multiple types A command related to the display of special game or production during special game, which is displayed only when a condition of one or a plurality of combinations such as generation of all occurrences, is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step 5626. On the other hand, in the case of No in either step 5618 or step 5620, in step 5624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the big hit progress display, and proceeds to step 5626.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect displayed during the jackpot execution a special effect based on the number of consecutive hits of the jackpot (the initial hit is not counted), and the second main game start opening In the case where a big hit is caused by the holding caused by the entry of the electric accessory B11d during the longest opening, even if the big hit is the first hit, the second main game start opening electric combination is counted as the number of consecutive games. It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of the change related to the hold that occurs during the longest release of the object B11d. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of conditions as conditions for generating an ending effect, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit with a specific effect) , Etc.) may be considered to be satisfied.

  Next, in Step 5626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 5626, in step 5628, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 5630, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special gaming flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5700). . In addition, also when it is No in step 5604 or step 5626, it transfers to the next process (process of step 5700).

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of an error notification execution process according to the subroutine of step 5700 in FIG. First, in step 5702, the error notification control means SM30 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not an error occurrence command is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 5702, in step 5704, the error notification control means SM30 determines an error notification mode and an error notification end condition based on the error type corresponding to the received error occurrence command, and executes error notification.

  Next, in step 5706, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not the error notification end condition determined in the above-described processing is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 5706, in step 5708, the error notification control means SM30 ends the error notification related to the error that satisfies the error notification end condition, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 5020). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 5702 or step 5706, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 5020).

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game short time flag is off), and The winning ratio between the main game starting port (the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10) and the general winning port when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is OFF) When the direction of the game nail is changed illegally by calculating and displaying it on the entry state display device in a different display mode depending on whether it is a normal entry ratio or an abnormal entry ratio Even when the direction of the game nail changes due to the collision of the game ball or the game ball, it can be determined by the abnormal display of the ball entry state detection device, and a more fair game machine can be secured.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that it is possible to determine whether or not the direction of the game nail (the state of the game nail) is normal based on the ball entry ratio between the main game start opening and the general winning opening. The mode of determining whether or not the state is normal is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration for determining the state of the game nail different from the present embodiment is a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 53 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main game board M according to the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2250 (second) and step 2300 (second), that is, after executing the special game control process described above in step 1600, in step 2250 (second), The control board M performs a base determination process described later. Next, in step 2300 (second), the main control board M executes a maintenance mode execution process to be described later, and proceeds to step 1900.

  Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2509-1 (second) to step 2509-3 (second), that is, in step 2508, the total discharge ball check means MJ11 -C90 is a total discharge check number counter. 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of MJ11c-90. Next, in step 2509-1 (second), the total discharged ball confirmation means MJ11 -C90 determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time is short). It is determined whether or not the flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2509-1 (second), in step 2509-2 (second), the total discharged ball confirmation means MJ11 -C90 is not currently executing a special game (the condition device operation flag is off) ) Or not. In the case of Yes in step 2509-2 (second), in step 2509-3 (second), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90, the normal total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C91 {non-probability variation gaming state and When the non-time-reduced game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of the detected counter for measuring the number of game balls}, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600). It should be noted that if the result of step 2509 (second) or step 2509-2 (second) is No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). As described above, in the second embodiment, the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time short flag is off) and the special game is not being executed ( When the condition device operation flag is OFF), the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is configured to add 1 to the normal-time discharge confirmation number counter value when detecting the entry of the game ball.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that step 2706-1 (second) to step 2706-3 (second), step 2716-1 (second) to step 2716-3 (second), and step 2736- 1 (second) to step 2736-3 (second), that is, in step 2704, the winning ball payout determining means MH determines the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc according to the first main game starting port. The number of payout balls (3 balls in this example) is added. Next, in step 2706-1 (second), the winning ball payout determining means MH determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming short time flag is set). It is determined whether or not it is off. In the case of Yes in step 2706-1 (second), in step 2706-2 (second), whether the winning ball payout determination means MH is not currently executing a special game (the condition device operation flag is OFF) Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2706-2 (second), in step 2706-3 (second), the prize ball payout determining means MH determines the normal prize ball number counter MHc-2 (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time reduction) In order to measure the number of prize balls paid out when the game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game short time flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (the conditional device operation flag is off) The number of prize balls to be paid out for the first main game starting port (in this example, 3 balls) is added to the counter value of (the counter of (1)), and the process proceeds to step 2708. Note that if the answer is No in step 2706-1 (second) or step 2706-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2708.

  In step 2714, the winning ball payout determining means MH adds the winning ball payout number (3) related to the second main game starting port to the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2716-1 (second), the winning ball payout determining means MH determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming short time flag is set). It is determined whether or not it is off. If step 2716-1 (second) is Yes, in step 2716-2 (second), the prize-ball payout determining means MH is not currently executing a special game (conditional device operation flag is off). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2716-2 (second), in step 2716-3 (second), the winning ball payout determining means MH sets the counter value of the normal time winning ball number counter MHc-2 to the second main game start port. Is added to the number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example), and the process proceeds to step 2718. Note that if the result is No in step 2716-1 (second) or step 2716-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2718.

  In step 2734, after adding the number of prize balls paid out for the general winning opening (in this example, 10 balls) to the prize ball number counter value, in step 2736-1 (second), the prize ball payout determining means MH Then, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time shortening flag is off). If step 2736-1 (second) is Yes, in step 2736-2 (second), the prize-ball payout determining means MH is not currently executing a special game (conditional device operation flag is OFF). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2736-2 (second), in step 2736-3 (second), the prize ball payout determining means MH determines the prize value related to the general winning opening as the counter value of the normal prize ball number counter MHc-2. The number of balls paid out (10 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2738. Note that if the result is No in step 2736-1 (second) or step 2736-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2738.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the base determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) in FIG. 53 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2252, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “normal prize ball number counter value / normal total discharge confirmation number counter value × 100” as a base value. Here, the base value is an expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out for 100 shot game balls in a situation where a special game is not won, that is, a prize ball payout with respect to the number of game balls emitted. Number ratio. In the present embodiment, the base value is calculated only for situations in which the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game short time flag is off). In addition, since all the game balls that have been fired are configured to pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, “all the game balls that have been fired = total discharge confirmation number counter value”, and “non-stochastic variation gaming state and All game balls fired in a non-time-reduced game state (the main game probability change flag is OFF and the main game time flag is OFF) and no special game is being executed (the conditional device operation flag is OFF) = Normal total discharge confirmation number counter value ”. Next, in step 2254, the maintenance mode control means MO overwrites the base value calculated in step 2252 as the current base value, temporarily stores it, and proceeds to the next process {step 2300 (second)}. Thus, in the present embodiment, the base value is calculated based on the normal total discharge confirmation number counter value and the normal prize ball number counter value, and is updated as needed. Note that the calculation method of the base value is not limited to this, and the base value may be calculated every time a predetermined period elapses (an example of such a configuration will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing according to the subroutine of Step 2300 (second) in FIG. 53 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2302, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the door unit D18 is open (the door open flag is on). In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the firing handle D44 has detected a predetermined operation (for example, an operation in which the sensor detects that it is being fired). In the case of Yes in step 2304, in step 2306, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the current base value temporarily stored in the processing of step 2254 on the entering state display device J10, and the next processing (step 1900). The process proceeds to (1). On the other hand, also in the case of No in Step 2302 or Step 2304, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1900). Thus, in the present embodiment, the base value is displayed on the entering state display device J10 by executing two operations, that is, opening the door unit D18 and a predetermined operation of the firing handle D44. Yes. The launch handle D44 is a member that can be operated by operating from the front of the gaming machine, but is not directly connected to the main control board M, and the main control board M side determines whether or not the launch handle D44 is operated. It has become difficult. Therefore, in order to configure the maintenance mode by operating the firing handle D44 (displaying information related to the entry), the main control board M side receives a signal indicating that the firing handle D44 has been operated. It needs to be configured so that it can. A configuration for solving such a problem will be described later. It should be noted that the display conditions for the display relating to the other entrances shown in this example may be the same as the display conditions of the entrance state display device J10 illustrated in FIG.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game short time flag is off), In addition, when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is OFF), the prizes of the main game start opening (the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10) and the general winning opening By calculating the base value from the number of balls paid out and the total number of balls discharged (number of shot balls), and displaying the calculated base value on the entry state display device, a more detailed game ball entry situation can be obtained. It can be confirmed.

  In the second embodiment, the player is configured not to display the base value on the entering state display device J10, that is, not to execute the maintenance mode, and the maintenance is performed with a simple operation. For example, the maintenance mode may be executed by operating the launch handle and the RAM clear button on the main control board M side.

  In the second embodiment, the standby demonstration screen (the screen displayed on the effect display device when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined period of time, for example, when the firing handle is not operated for 5 minutes) The standby demonstration screen is displayed), and the maintenance mode is displayed by operating the sub-input button and entering the correct password while the password display screen is displayed. It may be configured.

  In the second embodiment, the display contents displayed in the maintenance mode may be configured to display winning number information (the number of game balls that have entered the various entrances) and a winning ball payout number. As a specific example, the main game symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20) is configured so that a plurality of (for example, 32) dot displays can be lit. The winning number information (the number of game balls that have entered the various entrances) and the number of winning balls paid out may be displayed by displaying the plurality of dots. In addition, by transmitting a command to the sub-control board S side by satisfying the predetermined condition (for example, when it is determined that the entrance ratio is abnormal), the predetermined condition is satisfied by lighting the frame decoration lamp D18-L. It may be configured such as notifying that it is satisfied, notifying that the predetermined condition is satisfied by sound from the speaker D24, and the like. Further, the main control board M may be configured to have a maintenance mode execution flag as a flag indicating that the maintenance mode is being executed. Specifically, when the maintenance mode execution flag is off. The main game symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20) displays changes in the main game symbols and stop symbols, while the maintenance mode execution flag is on. If it is, the main game symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20) will enter the entry gate (winning entrance) that is the target of the prize ball payout You may comprise so that the information (henceforth the information which concerns on a ball entering) concerning a ball | bowl may be displayed.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the main control board M side and the calculated base value is displayed on the main control board M side. However, the processing until the base value is displayed is described. The flow is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration for displaying a base value different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of a maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of Step 2300 (second) in FIG. 53 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, a change from the second embodiment is Step 2308 (second modification 1), that is, when the firing handle D44 detects a predetermined operation in Step 2304, in Step 2308 (second modification 1), The maintenance mode control means MO sets a maintenance mode start command (a command to the sub-control board S side and includes information on the current base value), and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1900). . In this way, the command for starting the maintenance mode is set from the main control board M to the sub control board S. The maintenance mode is a general term for a configuration for displaying information related to the entrance of game balls to various entrances, and is displayed on the above-described entrance state display device J10 and on an effect display device SG described later. The display is also included in the maintenance mode.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit SM side according to the first modification from the second embodiment. First, a change from the present embodiment is step 5750 (second variation 1) in FIG. 5E, that is, maintenance mode display control means SM32 will be described later in step 5750 (second variation 1). The maintenance mode display process is executed, and the process proceeds to the hold information management process in step 5100.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process according to the subroutine of step 5750 (second modified 1) in FIG. 59 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 5752, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not a maintenance mode start command {command set in step 2308 (second variation 1)} from the main control board M side has been received. . In the case of Yes in step 5752, in step 5754, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the current base value on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 5100). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5752, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 5100).

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game short time flag is Off) and when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off) and the main game start port (first main game start port A10 and second main game start port B10) and the general A base value is calculated on the main control board M side from the number of prize balls paid out and the total number of discharged balls (number of shot balls) with the winning opening, and the calculated base value is transmitted to the sub control board S side. By configuring so that the base value is displayed on the side effect display device SG, the maintenance mode is easily activated based on the operation of the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) on the front surface of the gaming machine.

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In the first modification from the second embodiment, the maintenance mode is started by operating the launch handle D44 and the door unit D18. However, as described above, the launch handle D44 is operated by the main control board. It must be configured to be detectable on the M side. Therefore, the preferred configuration for starting the maintenance mode with the current electrical configuration of the gaming machine is a modified example 2 from the second embodiment, and hereinafter, the modified points from the modified example 1 from the second embodiment. Only will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of main game start-in entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of Step 2200 in FIG. 9 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2212-4 (second variation 2) and step 2231-4 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2212-2, the current special game Is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is OFF), in step 2212-4 (second variation 2), the first main game start entrance ball judging means MJ11-A A command (a command to the sub-control board S side, a command relating to the fact that a game ball has entered the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, or the general winning port P10) is set (step 1990). The control command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 2222.

  If it is determined in step 2231-2 that the special game is not currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is OFF), in step 2231-4 (second variation 2), the second main game start entrance ball The determination means MJ11-B is a start opening command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and a game ball enters the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10 or the general winning opening P10. A command related to that effect) is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1990), and the process proceeds to step 2240.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the general winning opening entrance detection processing according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 9 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2411-4 (second variable 2), that is, in step 2411-2, when the special game is not currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is OFF). In step 2212-4 (second variation 2), the general winning entry entrance determining means MJ11-P is a start entrance entering command (command to the sub-control board S side, the first main game starting entrance A10, A command related to the fact that a game ball has entered the second main game start opening B10 or the general winning opening P10) (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1990), and step 2420 Move on to processing.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of Step 2500 in FIG. 9 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2509-4 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2509-2 (second), the special game is not currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). In step 2509-4 (second variation 2), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is a discharge ball command (command to the sub-control board S side, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is a game ball) Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process of step 1990), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 64 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit SM side in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 5800 (second variation 2) and step 5900 (second variation 2) in FIG. 5E, that is, step 5800 (second variation 2). The sub control board S executes a base determination process described later. Next, in step 5900 (second variation 2), the sub control board S executes a maintenance mode display process described later, and proceeds to the process of step 5100.

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the base determination process according to the subroutine of Step 5800 (second modified 2) in FIG. 64 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 5802, the sub-control board S is set by the start entrance ball command {step 2212-4 (second modification 2) or step 2231-4 (second modification 2) from the main control board M side. Command} is determined. In the case of Yes in Step 5802, in Step 5804, the sub control board S determines that the sub-side normal prize ball number counter SN10c {non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is set). Off) and when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), the award of the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10 or the general winning port P10 This is a counter for managing the number of balls paid out on the side of the sub control board S, and the starting opening prize ball number (3 balls in this example) is added to the counter value stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Add, and the process proceeds to step 5806. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5802, the process proceeds to step 5806. Next, in step 5806, the sub-control board S determines whether or not a general pitching command {command set in step 2411-4 (second variation 2)} from the main control board M side has been received. . In the case of Yes in step 5806, in step 5808, the sub-control board S adds the number of general winning mouth prize balls (10 balls in this example) to the counter value of the sub-side normal prize ball number counter SN10c. Move on to processing. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5806, the process proceeds to step 5810.

  Next, in step 5810, the sub control board S determines whether or not the discharge ball command {command set in step 2509-4 (second variation 2)} from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5810, in step 5812, the sub-control board S determines that the sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter SJ10c {non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is In order to manage the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s on the side of the sub control board S when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is OFF). The number of discharges (1) is added to the counter value of} stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S, and the process proceeds to step 5814. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5810, the process proceeds to step 5814. Next, in step 5814, the sub control board S calculates “sub-side normal prize ball number counter value / sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter value × 100” as a base value. Next, in step 5816, the sub control board S overwrites the calculated base value as the current base value and temporarily stores it, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 5900 (second modified 2)}. As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the sub-control board S side.

  Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process according to the subroutine of Step 5900 (second modification 2) in FIG. 64 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 5902, the sub control board S determines whether or not the door unit D18 is open (the door open flag is on). In the case of Yes in step 5902, in step 5904, the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 5904, in step 5906, the sub control board S displays the temporarily stored current base value on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 5100). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 5902 or step 5904, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5100). As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, two operations of opening the door unit D18 and operating the sub input button (for example, off → on for 0.5 seconds or less → off) are executed. Thus, the base value is displayed on the effect display device SG. The sub input button SB is connected to the sub control board S and is configured to be operated by an operation from the front of the gaming machine. That is, the base value is displayed on the effect display device SG by opening the door unit D18 and operating from the front of the gaming machine. It should be noted that the display conditions for the display related to the other entry shown in this example may be the same as the display conditions of the effect display device SG illustrated in FIG.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment, the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming short time flag is Main game start ports (first main game start port A10 and second main game start port B10) in a state in which the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off). The main control board M counts the number of prize balls paid out and the total number of discharged balls (number of shot balls) with the general winning opening, and transmits the counted result to the sub-control board S side. The sub control board S is configured to calculate a base value based on the information related to the count received from the main control board M side, and to display the base value calculated by the effect display device SG on the sub control board S side. Thus, most of the processing relating to the display of the game ball entering state (in particular, display of the base value in this example) can be executed on the side of the sub control board S, and the data capacity used in the main control board M Can be reduced. Also, when the maintenance mode is started, the maintenance mode can be started by opening the door unit D18 and operating the sub input button SB connected to the sub control board S side. This makes it easy to start the maintenance mode. In addition, when displaying the base value (or the information relating to the above-described entry) on the effect display device SG, it is desirable to display it at a position that does not overlap with other displays. Specifically, the decorative symbol display in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the hold indication on the first main game side in the first hold display portion SG12, the hold indication on the second main game side in the second hold display portion SG13, an error It is desirable that the display of such a display (such as an error when the door open flag is turned on) and the display of the base value do not overlap.

  In the second modification from the second embodiment, the calendar function using the RTC function (which is a real-time clock, details will be described later) has an authentication key for each date (the authentication key is different for each date). The maintenance mode may be displayed when a correct input operation is performed on the sub input button.

  Further, in the second modification from the second embodiment, as the input mode of the sub input button, the back command or the hidden command (the sub input button operation mode exists, but the operation mode is not notified to the player. The maintenance mode may be displayed by executing the operation mode.

  In the second modification from the second embodiment, a command is input only for a predetermined time (for example, a predetermined operation is performed on a sub input button) using an RTC function (which is a real-time clock, details will be described later). The maintenance mode may be displayed when a correct command is input.

  Further, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the winning information relating to which entry opening and how many winning balls are paid out is sent from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S may be configured to count based on the received pitch information, and the pitch information includes the first grand prize opening, the second big prize opening, and the general prize. It may be a mouth, an auxiliary game start port, an out port, a game ball that has passed through a total discharge confirmation sensor, and the like.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the main control board M side and the calculated base value is displayed on the main control board M side. However, the processing until the base value is displayed is described. The flow is not limited to this. Accordingly, a configuration for displaying a base value different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as a third modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, an example of the memory map of the main control chip according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The main control chip is mounted on the main control board M. The memory map shows an address space from “0000H” to “FFFFH”. Of these, the built-in ROM is assigned to the space from “0000H” to “2FFFH”, the built-in RAM is assigned to the space from “F000H” to “F3FFH”, and the space from “FE00H” to “FEBFH” is assigned. Is assigned a register area (built-in register area) built in each circuit in the main control chip. By causing the CPU to execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to execute access to the corresponding hardware.

  The built-in ROM is a first ROM area that is mainly an area for controlling the progress of the game (sometimes referred to as a use area), and an area that controls processing different from the normal progress of the game mainly related to errors (not yet). A second ROM area, which may be referred to as a use area), a first control area assigned to a space from “0000H” to “11FAH”, and from “1200H” to “1D9EH” The first data area allocated to the first space is collectively referred to as the first ROM area, the second control area allocated to the space from “2000H” to “22E4H”, and “22E5H” to “2346H”. The second data area allocated to the space up to "is collectively referred to as a second ROM area. The first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity existing in the first ROM area and accessed by the CPU exists in the second ROM area and the CPU Configured to be larger than the data capacity accessed from

  The first ROM area stores a first control area in which program codes (instruction code sets for the CPU) are stored, and program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPU based on the program codes). A first data area. In the figure, the memory map image in the first ROM area is illustrated, but the number of bytes in each area and the presence / absence of an unused area are merely examples.

  The second ROM area stores a second control area in which program code (instruction code set for the CPU) is stored, and program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPU based on the program code). And the second control area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first control area (in other words, the second control area exists in the second control area and is accessed by the CPU). The program code capacity is smaller than the program code capacity existing in the first control area and accessed by the CPU), and the second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first data area. (In other words, the program data capacity that exists in the second data area and is accessed by the CPU is in the first data area. It is smaller than the program data capacity to be accessed from the existing CPU). The built-in ROM has a management area in which various settings used when operating the main control chip are stored. In the figure, the memory map image in the second ROM area is illustrated, but the number of bytes in each area and the presence / absence of an unused area are merely examples.

  The first ROM area only needs to include a first control area (sometimes referred to as a use area control area) and a first data area (sometimes referred to as a use area data area). The first address in the first control area to the last address in the first data area may be referred to as a first ROM area. Further, if the second ROM area includes a second control area (sometimes referred to as a control area outside the use area) and a second data area (sometimes referred to as a data area outside the use area). Of course, the first address in the second control area to the last address in the second data area may be referred to as a second ROM area.

  Next, the built-in RAM is based on a first RAM area which is an area for storing information mainly based on the progress of the game (sometimes referred to as a use area) and processing different from normal progress of the game mainly related to errors. A second RAM area that is an area for storing information (sometimes referred to as outside the use area), and a first work area assigned to a space from “F000H” to “F149H”; The first stack area allocated to the space from “F1D8H” to “F1FFH” is collectively referred to as the first RAM area, and the second work area allocated to the space from “F210H” to “F21DH” The second stack area allocated to the space from “F3F2H” to “F3FFH” is collectively referred to as a second RAM area. Note that the space from “F1D8H” to “F1FFH” in the first RAM area is allocated with the first stack area used when the program related to the first ROM / RAM area needs to store data internally. In addition, the space from “F3F2H” to “F3FFH” in the second RAM area is allocated a second stack area that is used when the program related to the second ROM / RAM area needs to store data internally. (However, the number of bytes in each area is merely an example.) The first stack area may not be included in the first RAM area, and the second stack area may not be included in the second RAM area. In such a configuration, for example, “F000H” The first RAM area is allocated to the space up to “F149H”, and the second RAM area is allocated to the space from “F210H” to “F21DH”. The first RAM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second RAM area.

  Note that the first RAM area only needs to include the first work area (sometimes referred to as the working area work area). You may call it 1RAM area. The second RAM area only needs to include a second work area (sometimes referred to as a work area outside the use area), from the start address of the second work area to the last address of the second stack area. It may be referred to as a second RAM area.

  It should be noted that although there is no problem even if the address which is an unused area is changed, it is preferable to provide an unused area between the first data area and the second control area. That is, in the case of the memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 67, the program code that exists in the first control area and is accessed by the CPU, and the program code that exists in the second control area and is accessed by the CPU are: Since they are arranged apart from each other on the memory map (with discontinuous addresses) and an unused area is sandwiched between them, the location of both program codes on the program source code or dump list can be viewed visually. It can be clearly separated (the same can be said when an unused area is sandwiched between them). Similarly, an unused area is also provided between the first control area and the second data area. The first control area, which is a control area related to the progress of the game, and the data area related to the progress of the game. Since the unused area is sandwiched between the first data area and the first data area, the arrangement positions of both program codes can be clearly separated visually on the program source code or the dump list. In addition, since the first address of the first data area is a clear number such as “1200H”, it can be easily designed. On the other hand, no unused area is provided between the second control area and the second data area. Since the second control area and the second data area are areas that are not related to the game progress and have a relatively small capacity, the arrangement positions of both program codes on the program source code or the dump list are determined. Since priority is given to reducing the capacity to be used rather than clearly distinguishing visually, no unused area is provided between the second control area and the second data area.

  Here, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured not to provide an unused area (an unfilled area) in order to prevent a program or the like modified by an illegal act from being written. It is preferable (for example, all unused areas are filled with zeros, and used areas are filled in young addresses and written). In addition, in order to prevent the first control area and the first data area from referring to data that is not normally referred to due to noise or fraudulent behavior, unused data (for example, in a gaming machine with different specifications) It is preferable not to provide data to be used or data used only for testing at the development stage. In addition, the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, the second data area, the first work area, and the second work area are arranged in a young address and used in the area (in the area). (For example, “0010H” to “0050H” in the first control area in the range of “0000H” to “11FAH” are not set as unused areas). It is preferable to do. In this example, all the bits in the unused area are “0”, and any bit other than the unused area is “1” (not “0”). ing).

  Next, FIG. 68 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1030 (second modification 3) to step 1032 (second modification 3).

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
First, the processing at the time of timer interruption is started, and the processing of Step 2000 to Step 1600 is executed as processing in the first ROM / RAM area. Then, in Step 1030 (second modification 3), the main control board M is connected to the second ROM / RAM. Perform a region processing call.

<Processing in the second ROM / RAM area>
Next, in step 2250 (second), the main control board M executes the base determination process described above. Next, in step 2300 (second), the main control board M executes the above-described maintenance mode execution process. Next, in step 1032 (second modification 3), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM / RAM area, and thereafter executes steps 1900 to 1990 as processing in the first ROM / RAM area. Become.

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment, the first ROM area and the second ROM area are provided, and the first RAM area and the second RAM area are provided. The data used in the first ROM / RAM area of the main control board M is configured to execute the process for calculating the base value and the process for displaying the base value in the process in the second ROM / RAM area. The capacity can be reduced.

(Third embodiment)
In the present embodiment and the second embodiment, the entrance ratio N (start entrance ball count counter value / general entrance count counter value) or base value (predetermined entrance entrance prize ball payout number is a game ball. Any of the values obtained by dividing the total number of shot balls by 100) can be displayed as information related to the incoming ball. However, the display method for the incoming ball is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration related to the method for displaying information related to the entrance different from the present embodiment and the second embodiment is referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 69 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that step 1024 (third) and step 1026 (third) in the process of FIG. 10C and step 2300 (third) of the process of FIG. Yes, that is, in FIG. 10C, in step 1024 (third), the main control board M erases the display of the ball entry state display device J10. Next, in step 1026 (third), the main control board M turns off the maintenance mode flag, and proceeds to step 1020. As described above, the maintenance mode (display in the ball entry state display device J10) to be described later is configured to end when the power is turned off. Further, in FIG. 6B, after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 2300 (third), the main control board M executes a maintenance mode execution process, which will be described later. Transition.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to Step 2300 (third) in FIG. 69 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2310, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. If Yes in step 2310, it is determined in step 2312 whether or not a predetermined operation of the RAM clear button (for example, long press for 10 seconds or more) has been performed. In this process, only a long press started from the power-on state is determined, and if an operation that becomes Yes is executed in step 1002, that is, the length of the RAM clear button is changed from the power-off state. When the push starts to be executed, the process does not become Yes. That is, if the power-on switch Ea is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed, the result is Yes in step 1002, but even if the RAM clear button is continuously pressed from that state, the result is not Yes in step 2312. On the other hand, if the power-on switch Ea is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the result of step 1002 is not Yes, and after that, the RAM clear button is continuously pressed (long press of the RAM clear button). In step 2312, Yes.

  In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the maintenance mode control means MO determines the winning ball counter MHc {the respective ball entrances (first main game start port A10, second main game start port to be paid out). B10, the number of prize balls to be awarded based on the number of entries to B10, the general entrance P10, the 1st grand prize opening C10, the 2nd big prize opening C20), and the cumulative number calculated after the power is turned on } Is displayed on the entrance state display device J10. Next, in step 2316, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag, and proceeds to the processing of step 2318. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2310, the process proceeds to step 2318. Next, in Step 2318, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (unlike pressing in this process, the RAM clear button is turned off → 0.5 seconds. It is determined that the button has been pressed once when the following is switched from on to off). In the case of Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the maintenance mode control means MO refers to the display table during maintenance mode and displays the display content corresponding to the display number next to the currently displayed display number in the entered state. The image is displayed on the display device, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1900). Note that if the answer is No in Step 2312 or Step 2318, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1900).

  Further, the table on the upper right side of the figure is an example of a display content table during the maintenance mode. In the maintenance mode display contents table, display contents (counter values) corresponding to display numbers 1 to 4 are set. Every time the RAM clear button is operated, “display number 1 → display number 2 → display number 3 ... The display content on the entrance state display device J10 is switched to the display content corresponding to “.”. As a specific example of the display in the entrance state display device J10, when the RAM clear button is pressed and held for 10 seconds or more from the power-on state, the award that is the display content of the display number 1 is displayed on the entrance state display device J10. Number counter MHc {Entrances to be paid out (first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10, general entrance port P10, first big prize port C10, second big prize) The counter value of the cumulative number calculated from the power-on of the number of prize balls to be awarded based on the entry to the mouth C20) is displayed, and then the RAM clear button is pressed Then, the starting state entrance number counter MJ12c (displayed content of the display number 2 is displayed on the entrance state display device J10 (the game that entered the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 under a specific situation). Measuring the number of balls When the RAM clear button is pressed after that, a total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 (total discharge confirmation sensor, which is the display content of display number 3, is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. When the counter value of the C90s detected game ball count) is displayed and then the RAM clear button is pressed, the number of general balls that are the display contents of the display number 4 is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. The counter value of the counter MJ13c (a counter that measures the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening P10 under a specific situation) is displayed. Further, when the RAM clear button is pressed in a state where the general number-of-balls counter value that is the display content of the display number 4 is displayed, the prize ball number counter value that is the display content of the display number 1 is displayed. Will be.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, a maintenance mode in which information related to entering a ball can be displayed by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on. Is configured to start the game, and each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, the display type in the maintenance mode is changed. be able to.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the maintenance mode is being executed, conditions for ending the maintenance mode include power-off recovery, various entrances (for example, the outlet C80, the auxiliary game starting port H10, etc.). Entry into the entrance that is not eligible for the prize ball payout). The condition for ending the maintenance mode may be a game ball entering a specific entrance that triggers the start of execution of a special game by entering the ball.

  In the third embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed, the input port of the RAM clear button is in an ON state. In such a case, the RAM clear button is kept for a predetermined time (for example, It is not determined whether or not it has been pressed (10 seconds or more) (Yes in step 2312), and the maintenance mode is not started. However, when the input port of the RAM clear button changes from the off state to the on state after the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more). The maintenance mode can be started. Whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated is determined by checking the input port of the RAM clear button a plurality of times at predetermined intervals, but when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button (step) At the time of determination at 1002, the input port of the RAM clear button is confirmed at an interval shorter than the interrupt processing execution interval, and after the power is turned on (at the time of determination at step 2312), the interrupt processing The input port of the RAM clear button is confirmed at the execution interval.

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the present embodiment to the third embodiment, the number of game balls entering the various entrances is always counted from the time the game machine is turned on, and the display based on the count situation is used as information related to the entry. Although it is configured to display, the display method of the situation related to the entry is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration related to the method of displaying information related to the entrance different from the present embodiment to the third embodiment is a modified example 1 from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail. Describe.

  FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the first modification from the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2300 (third variation 1) in the process of FIG. 10B. That is, after executing the special game control process in step 1600 of FIG. In step 2300 (third modification 1), the main control board M executes a maintenance mode execution process described later, and proceeds to a fraud detection information management process in step 1900.

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 2509-4 (third variation 1) and step 2509-5 (third variation 1). That is, in step 2508, 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90, and then in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 It is determined whether or not an operating flag (a flag that is turned on when the firing handle D44 is operated) is on. In the case of Yes in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), in step 2509-5 (third variation 1), the total discharge ball checking means MJ11-C90 is a total discharge maintenance counter MJ11c-C92 (increment counter, It is a counter that measures the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s during the period in which the launch handle D44 is being operated during the maintenance mode, and is stored in the RAM value of the main control board M). 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600). Even in the case of No in step 2509-4 (third modification 1), the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2600). With this configuration, the total discharge number maintenance counter value is added during the period in which the player operates the firing handle D44.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2700 in FIG. 9 in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are as follows. Step 2706-4 (Third Modification 1), Step 2706-5 (Third Modification 1), Step 2716-4 (Third Modification 1), Step 2716-5 (Third Modification 1) Modification 1), Step 2736-4 (Third Modification 1), and Step 2736-5 (Third Modification 1). That is, in step 2704, after adding the number of winning ball payouts (three balls in this example) related to the first main game starting port to the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc, step 2706-4 (third variable 1) ), The winning ball payout determining means MH determines whether or not the steering wheel operating flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2706-4 (third variation 1), in step 2706-5 (third variation 1), the prize ball payout determination means MH is a prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 (increment counter, which is a maintenance mode). It is a counter that measures the number of game balls that have entered the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, or the general winning port P10 during the period in which the launch handle D44 is being operated. The number of prize balls paid out for the first main game starting port (3 in this example) is added to the counter value (stored in the RAM area of the board M), and the process proceeds to step 2708. Note that the process proceeds to step 2708 also in the case of No in step 2706-4 (third variation 1).

  In step 2714, after adding the number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) related to the second main game start port to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, step 2716-4 (third variable 1) ), The winning ball payout determining means MH determines whether or not the steering wheel operating flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2716-4 (third variation 1), in step 2716-5 (third variation 1), the prize ball payout determining means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 to the second main value. The award ball payout number (three balls in this example) related to the game start port is added, and the process proceeds to step 2718.

  Further, in step 2734, after adding the number of prize balls paid out for the general winning opening P10 (10 balls in this example) to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, in step 2736-4 (third variation 1). The prize ball payout determining means MH determines whether or not the steering wheel operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2736-4 (third variation 1), in step 2736-5 (third variation 1), the winning ball payout determining means MH adds the general winning opening to the counter value of the winning ball maintenance counter MHc-3. The number of prize balls paid out (10 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2738. Thus, in the first modification from the third embodiment, when the firing handle D44 is operated, the addition process to the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 is performed separately from the addition process to the prize ball number counter MHc. Is configured to execute. Note that the process proceeds to step 2738 also in the case of No in step 2736-4 (third variation 1).

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of Step 2300 (third modification 1) in FIG. 71 in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. First, in step 2322, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the steering wheel operation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2322, in step 2324, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2324, in step 2326, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not there has been a predetermined operation of the RAM clear button (long press for 10 seconds or more) (only long press started from the power-on state). In the case where the operation that becomes Yes in step 1002 is executed, it is determined that the process is not Yes). In the case of Yes in step 2326, in step 2328, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and proceeds to the processing in step 2330. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2324, the process proceeds to step 2330.

  Next, in Step 2330, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has been started. In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the steering wheel operation flag, and proceeds to the processing of step 2334. Also in the case of No in step 2322, the process proceeds to step 2334. Next, in step 2334, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle is finished. In the case of Yes in step 2334, in step 2336, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “prize ball maintenance counter value ÷ total discharge maintenance counter value × 100” as the base value.

  Next, in Step 2338, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the calculated base value on the entering state display device J10. Next, in step 2340, the maintenance mode control means MO turns off the steering wheel operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1900). In addition, also in the case of No in step 2326, step 2330, or step 2334, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1900). As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the operation of the firing handle D44 is the base value for the period in which the firing handle D44 is operated after the RAM clear button is pressed and the maintenance mode is started. It is configured to display on the entrance state display device J10 at the end timing.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment, by pressing and holding the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information related to the entry can be obtained. It is configured to start a maintenance mode that can be displayed, and is configured to calculate and display the base value in the period during which the firing handle is operated during the maintenance mode on the main control board M side. Even when it is desired to confirm the base value for a predetermined period by firing a ball, it can be confirmed only by operating the firing handle and playing a game.

  Further, in the first modification from the third embodiment, when a game ball enters one of the entrances after a predetermined time elapses after the operation of the launch handle is finished, You may comprise so that the information which concerns on entrance including the number of entrances may be calculated. In such a configuration, a sensor that can detect that a game ball is flowing down in the game area may be provided.

(Modification 2 from the third embodiment)
In the first modification from the third embodiment, the base value of the period during which the firing handle is operated in the maintenance mode can be calculated and displayed. However, the execution mode of the maintenance mode is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that is an execution mode of the maintenance mode different from the first modification from the third embodiment is referred to as a second modification from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, changes from the first modification from the third embodiment are described. Only will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of Step 2300 (third variation 1) of FIG. 71 in Modification 2 from the third embodiment. First, the changes from the first modification from the third embodiment are as follows. Step 2341-1 (third modification 2), step 2341-2 (third modification 2), and step 2341-3 (third modification 2). ). That is, if it is determined in step 2326 that a predetermined operation (long press for 10 seconds or more) of the RAM clear button has been performed, in step 2341-1 (third modification 2), the maintenance mode control means MO By transmitting a command related to the gaming state to the sub-control board S side, the sub-control board S receives the received command relating to the current gaming state and a lighting mode table (main control board M side and sub-control) described later. The frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be a game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the current gaming state, The process proceeds to step 2328.

  Next, in step 2328, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and proceeds to step 2341-2 (third variation 2). In addition, also in the case of No in step 2324, the process proceeds to step 2341-2 (third modification 2). Next, in step 2341-2 (third modification 2), the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (pressing in this processing means that the RAM clear button is off → 0.5 second or less) Is determined to have been pressed once). In the case of Yes in step 2341-2 (third variation 2), in step 2341-3 (third second), the maintenance mode control means MO causes the maintenance mode lighting mode table (main control board M side and auxiliary control side to be described later). The gaming state is changed to the gaming state corresponding to the display number next to the display number corresponding to the current gaming state. Next, in step 2341-4 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO sends a command relating to the current gaming state to the sub control board S side, so that the sub control board S has received the current Frame decoration lamp D18-L with reference to the command relating to the gaming state and the maintenance mode lighting mode table (which is to be provided on each of the main control board M side and the sub control board S side). The game effect lamp D26 (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the current game state (the game state after the change), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Note that the process proceeds to step 2330 also in the case of No in step 2341-2 (third modification 2).

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of the lighting mode table during the maintenance mode. The game mode corresponding to display numbers 1 to 4 is set in the lighting mode table during the maintenance mode, and corresponds to “display number 1 → display number 2 → display number 3...” Every time the RAM clear button is operated. In addition to the transition to the gaming state, the frame decoration lamp D18-L (also referred to as the gaming effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting manner corresponding to the transitioned gaming state. As a specific example of the gaming state transition, when the RAM clear button is pressed for 10 seconds or longer from the power-on state, the gaming state corresponding to the display number 1 is a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (The main game probability change flag is off and the main game short time flag is off), and the frame decoration lamp D18-L (also referred to as the game effect lamp D26) is lit in red, which is the lighting mode corresponding to the game state To do. Thereafter, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the non-stochastic game state and the time-reduced game state (the main game probability change flag is turned off and the main game time flag is turned on) and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state The frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be a game effect lamp D26) is turned on in blue. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the state changes to the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is on and the main game time short flag is off), and the lighting mode corresponding to the gaming state The frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be a game effect lamp D26) is lit in green. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the state changes to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is on and the main gaming time short flag is on), and the lighting mode corresponding to the gaming state is changed. A frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be a game effect lamp D26) is lit in a certain yellow color. When the game state corresponding to the display number 4 is pressed and the RAM clear button is pressed, the game state corresponding to the display number 1 is entered and the lighting state corresponding to the game state is changed to red. Then, the frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is turned on. As described above, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the game state can be changed each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode. Even if you want to check the base value in the floating gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, change the gaming state to the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and then operate the launch handle to reduce the probability varying gaming state and the time. The base value in the gaming state can be confirmed. Further, by changing the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) depending on the gaming state, it becomes obvious at a glance which gaming state is present, and the base value confirmation work becomes easier. . In the second modification from the third embodiment, the game state is changed each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, and the frame decoration lamp D18-L (also referred to as the game effect lamp D26) is changed depending on the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state is not changed even if the RAM clear button is operated during the maintenance mode. However, the frame decoration lamp D18 is different because the gaming state is different. -L (may be a game effect lamp D26) lighting mode may be different, that is, the gaming state may be determined by the lighting mode of a frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be a game effect lamp D26). . Further, the configuration for determining the game state is not limited to the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26). For example, (1) the type of sound output from the speaker D24 , (2) Display mode by the effect display device SG, (3) Firing strength of the firing handle D44 (low strength → determined if left-handed → determined non-time-reduced gaming state, high strength → right-handed It may be configured such that it is determined that the game state is determined to be a time-reduced gaming state), and so on.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment, by pressing and holding the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information related to the entry can be obtained. It is configured to start a maintenance mode that can be displayed, the game state is changed every time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, and a frame decoration lamp (game effect lamp D26) is turned on in a lighting mode corresponding to the changed game state. Even if you want to check the base value for a given period in any gaming state, you can check by simply operating the launch handle and playing the game. Will be able to.

  Moreover, in the modified example 2 from 3rd Embodiment, although it comprised so that the information concerning the entrance according to a gaming state could be confirmed, as a display of the information concerning an entrance, a non-time shortening gaming state (non-probability fluctuation) Displays the number of winnings only in the gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, or the time-reduced gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, and It is also possible to display the number of winnings only when the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state).

  In the second modification from the third embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the start opening, the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening, and the total number of payout balls ( Cumulative number of award balls), number of award balls in a non-stochastic game state and non-time-reduced gaming state (or cumulative number of award balls), number of prize-balls paid in a time-reduced gaming state (or cumulative prizes) The number of balls paid out) may be displayed in the maintenance mode. Also, it is possible to open the big winning opening even during the maintenance mode (a configuration in which a big win can be won or a configuration in which a big win can be forced).

(Modification 3 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the display related to the maintenance mode is executed by the effect display device on the sub-control board S side in the maintenance mode, but the execution mode of the maintenance mode is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration that is the execution mode of the maintenance mode different from the third embodiment is referred to as a third modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in Modification 3 from the third embodiment. A change from the third embodiment is Step 2300 (third modification 3) in the processing of FIG. That is, in FIG. 7B, after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 2300 (third modification 3), the main control board M executes a maintenance mode execution process, which will be described later. Execute the fraud detection information management process.

  Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the main game start-entry ball detection process according to the subroutine of Step 2200 in FIG. 9 in Modification 3 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2215-5 (third modification 3), step 2212-6 (third modification 3), step 2231-5 (third modification 3), and step 2231-6 ( Third change 3). That is, after the first main game start port detection continuation flag is turned on in step 2210, in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), the first main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-A It is determined whether or not the middle flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), in step 2212-6 (third variation 3), the first main game starting entrance entering judgment means MJ11-A sets the starting entrance entrance number counter MJ12c. 1 is added to the counter value, and the process proceeds to step 2222. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2212-5 (third modification 3), the process proceeds to step 2222.

  Also, after turning on the second main game start opening detection continuation flag in step 2230, in step 2231-5 (third modification 3), the second main game start opening entering determining means MJ11-B is operating the steering wheel. It is determined whether or not the flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), in step 2231-6 (third variation 3), the second main game starting entrance ball judging means MJ11-B sets the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c. 1 is added to the counter value, and the process proceeds to Step 2240. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2231-5 (third modification 3), the process proceeds to step 2240. With this configuration, it is possible to count the number of game balls that have entered the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 when the player is operating the launch handle D44. It becomes.

  Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the general winning opening entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 9 in Modification 3 from the third embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 2411-5 (third modification 3) and step 2411-6 (third modification 3). That is, in step 2410, the general winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on, and in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), the general winning opening entry determining unit MJ11-P determines whether the steering wheel operation flag is on. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), in step 2411-6 (third variation 3), the general winning opening entry determining means MJ11-P sets the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ13c to 1. Are added (incremented), and the process proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2411-5 (third modification 3), the process proceeds to step 2420.

  Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of Step 2300 (third modification 1) in FIG. 71 in Modification 3 from the third embodiment. The change from the first modification from the third embodiment is Step 2100 (Third Modification 3), that is, when the operation of the launch handle D44 is completed in Step 2334, Step 2100 (Third Modification 3). ), The number-of-entry determination process described later is executed, and the handle operating flag is turned off in step 2340.

  Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the number-of-entry determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 2100 (third variation 3) in FIG. 79 in Modification 3 from the third embodiment. First, in step 2116, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “starting entrance ball number counter value / general ball number counter value” as the ball entering ratio N. Next, in Step 2118, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the entrance ratio N is within a predetermined range (1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4). In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the maintenance mode control means MO sends a command with a normal entrance ratio to the sub control board S, so that the sub control board S is frame-decorated lamp D18-L (game). The effect lamp D26 may be lit in the normal lighting mode, and the process proceeds to step 2124. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2118, in step 2122, the maintenance mode control means MO sends a command with an abnormal entrance ratio to the sub-control board S, so that the sub-control board S becomes the frame decoration lamp D18-L. The game effect lamp D26 may be turned on in an abnormal lighting mode, and the process proceeds to Step 2124. Next, in step 2124, the maintenance mode control means MO clears the counter value of the starting opening ball number counter MJ12c and the counter value of the general ball number counter MJ13c to zero and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2340). Transition. In addition, without providing the process of step 2124, it may be configured such that the entrance ratio can be calculated on the basis of the cumulative start entrance counter number and the general entrance counter value obtained by operating the firing handle a plurality of times. .

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third modification from the third embodiment, by pressing and holding the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information related to the entry can be obtained. It is configured to start a maintenance mode that can be displayed. During the maintenance mode, a frame decoration lamp (game effect lamp D26) indicates whether the pitch ratio between the main game start opening and the general winning opening is normal or abnormal. In other words, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game ball entry status (game nail status) is normal with a simpler display.

  In the third modification from the third embodiment, the cumulative number of balls entered from the start to the end of the maintenance mode may be notified by a device other than the effect display device. For example, when the power is on The measurement of the cumulative winning number may be started from the timing when the long press of the RAM clear button is detected and the maintenance mode is started, and it may be configured to determine and notify whether or not the cumulative winning number exceeds a threshold value. In addition, as an alerting | reporting aspect, you may alert | report by the lighting aspect of a gaming machine frame as mentioned above, and you may comprise so that it may alert | report by the sound from a speaker. By configuring in this way, even in pachinko gaming machines that do not have liquid crystal, such as the second kind pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to notify information related to the entry by the lighting state of the lamp and sound.

(Modification 4 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the display related to the maintenance mode is executed by the effect display device on the sub control board S side in the maintenance mode. However, the execution mode of executing the maintenance mode on the sub control board S is as follows. This is not a limitation. Therefore, the configuration that is the execution mode of the maintenance mode different from the third embodiment is referred to as a fourth modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the main game start entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of Step 2200 in FIG. 9 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 2212-4 (third variation 4) and step 2231-4 (third variation 4). That is, after the first main game start port detection continuation flag is turned on in step 2210, in step 2212-4 (third variation 4), the first main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-A A ball entering command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to Step 2222. Also, at step 2230, the second main game start port entry determining means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start port detection continuation flag, and at step 2231-4 (third variation 4), the second main game. The start port entrance determining means MJ11-B sets a start entrance ball command (command to the sub-control board S side), and proceeds to the processing of step 2240.

  Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the general winning opening entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 9 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. A change from the third embodiment is Step 2411-4 (third variation 4). That is, after the general winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on in step 2410, in step 2411-4 (third variation 4), the general winning opening entering determination means MJ11-P receives the general winning command (sub control board). S command) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2420.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. The change from this embodiment is Step 2509-4 (third variation 4). That is, in step 2508, 1 is added to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and then in step 2509-4 (third variation 4), the total discharge ball check means MJ11-C90 outputs the discharge ball command ( Command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing according to the subroutine of Step 2300 (third variation 4) in FIG. 69 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. First, in step 2342, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2342, in step 2343, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not there has been a predetermined operation of the RAM clear button (for example, long press for 10 seconds or longer) (only long press started from the power-on state). When the operation that becomes Yes in step 1002 is executed, it is not determined in this process. In the case of Yes in step 2343, in step 2344, the maintenance mode control means MO is a maintenance mode start command (a command to the sub control board S side, a command for starting the execution of the maintenance mode on the sub control board S side. ) Is set. Next, in step 2345, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1900). In addition, also when it is No in step 2342 or step 2343, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 85 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. First, a change from the present embodiment is Step 5900 (third modification 4) in FIG. That is, in step 5900 (third variation 4), the sub-control board S executes maintenance mode execution processing, and proceeds to base determination processing in step 5800 (second variation 2).

  Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing according to the subroutine of Step 5900 (third and fourth) in FIG. 85 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. First, in step 5908, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the inside of the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and determines whether or not the maintenance mode display flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 5908, in step 5910, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a maintenance mode start command from the main control board M side has been received. . If Yes in step 5910, in step 5912, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns on the maintenance mode display flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b. Next, in step 5914, a display indicating that it is the maintenance mode is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the process proceeds to step 5916. In addition, when displaying that it is in the maintenance mode on the effect display device SG, display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display region SG11, hold display on the first main game side in the first hold display portion SG12, 2 The display of the hold display on the second main game side in the hold display section SG13, the display related to an error (such as an error when the door open flag is turned on), and the display indicating that the maintenance mode is in effect are not overlapped. It is desirable. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5908, the process proceeds to step 5916. The maintenance mode display control means SM32 is provided in the sub control board S, and on the side of the sub control board S, the control process for starting the maintenance mode and the information related to the entrance used in the maintenance mode are provided. The maintenance mode display control means SM32 is configured to execute the calculation process and the like. The maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b is provided in the sub-control board S and temporarily stores information to be executed by the maintenance mode display control means SM32.

  Next, in step 5916, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and a base measurement in progress flag (a flag that is turned on during the measurement of the base value). It is determined whether or not is off. In the case of Yes in step 5916, in step 5918, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been pressed. In the case of Yes in step 5918, in step 5920, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 is a base measurement timer SM32t (a timer for measuring the period during which the base value is measured and is stored in the RAM area on the sub-control board S side. Is stored) and the timer value is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 5922, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns on the base measurement in-progress flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and proceeds to step 5924. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5916, the process proceeds to step 5924.

  Next, in step 5924, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the sub input button SB is pressed. In the case of Yes in step 5924, in step 5926, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 stops the base measurement timer SM32t and displays the timer value on the effect display device SG. In the case of displaying the timer value of the base measurement timer SM32t on the effect display device SG, the decorative symbol display in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the hold indication on the first main game side in the first hold display portion SG12, 2 The hold display on the second main game side in the hold display section SG13, the display related to the error (such as an error that the door open flag is turned on), etc., and the display of the timer value of the base measurement timer SM32t do not overlap. It is desirable to configure. Next, in step 5928, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the current base value (the base value when the base measurement flag is on and the base value calculated in step 5816 in FIG. 87). Display on the device SG. Next, in step 5930, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns off the base measurement in-progress flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and proceeds to the processing of step 5932. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 5918 or step 5924, the process proceeds to step 5932.

  Next, in step 5932, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the maintenance mode has ended (as described above, the maintenance mode ends due to the occurrence of a power failure). In the case of Yes in step 5932, in step 5934, the display related to the maintenance mode on the effect display device SG is erased. Next, in step 5936, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns off the maintenance mode display flag, and proceeds to the next process {step 5800 (second variation 2)}. In addition, also in the case of No in step 5910 or step 5932, the process proceeds to the next process {step 5800 (second modified 2)}. In this example, the maintenance mode is configured to end when the power is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Also good.

  Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the base determination process according to the subroutine of Step 5800 (second second) in FIG. 85 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. The difference from the second modification from the second embodiment is step 5818 (third variation 4). That is, in step 5818 (third variation 4), the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether the base measurement in-progress flag is on. If YES in step 5818 (third change 4), the flow advances to step 5802. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5818 (third variation 4), the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 5100). With this configuration, in the fourth modification from the third embodiment, the base value is calculated only during the period when the base measurement in-progress flag is on.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the third embodiment, by pressing and holding the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information related to the entry can be obtained. The maintenance mode that can be displayed is configured to start on the sub-control board S side. During the maintenance mode, the measurement of the base value is started by pressing the sub input button, and the sub input button is pressed again. By ending the measurement of the base value and displaying the measured base value, it is possible to confirm the base value for an arbitrary predetermined period by executing a simple operation on the sub-control board S side. Become.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the entry state is confirmed by displaying the entry information by the entry state display device on the main control board M side. However, the entry state is confirmed. Is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that is a confirmation mode of the entering situation different from the present embodiment is a fourth embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 8 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 3503 (fourth). That is, in step 3502, the external signal output control means MG determines the number of winning balls counter MHc {the respective entrances (first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, The counter value of the cumulative number calculated after the power-on of the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry to the ball mouth P10, the first grand prize opening C10, and the second big prize opening C20) , The counter value of the start opening ball number counter MJ12c (counter that measures the number of game balls that have entered the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 under a specific situation), the total discharge confirmation number counter The counter value of MJ11c-C90 (counter for measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s) and the general ball counter MJ13c (the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening P10 under a specific situation) A counter value of the counter value to be measured (in the fourth embodiment, in the treatment RAM area of the main control board M, the award ball number counter value, the start opening ball number counter value, the total discharge confirmation number counter value, And the general entrance number counter value are stored) from the external terminal, and the process proceeds to step 3504.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the counter values of the winning ball number counter MHc, the start opening ball number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general pitch number counter MJ13c are increased by 1, It may be configured to output a signal (it is preferable to apply the configuration to the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c and the general entrance number counter MJ13c, which are counters whose counter values tend to be relatively small values. is there). Further, when each counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc, the starting opening ball number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general pitch number counter MJ13c is increased by 10, one signal is output. (It is preferable to apply the configuration to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 and the winning ball number counter MHc, which are counters whose counter values are likely to be relatively large). In addition, when a configuration is made such that signals relating to the winning ball number counter MHc, the starting opening ball number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general pitch number counter MJ13c are output as output information from the external terminal. May be configured to output signals (external terminal signals) from different external terminals for each counter. With such a configuration, even when an external terminal signal that can be output only on / off is used, it is possible to determine which counter the output information is. Alternatively, the external terminal signal may be output only when the maintenance mode flag is on (when the maintenance mode is in effect).

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, as the output information from the external terminal, the prize ball number counter value, the starting entrance ball number counter value, the total discharge confirmation number counter value, In addition, the general number-of-entries counter value can be output, and information related to the in-coming can be confirmed from outside the gaming machine.

  In addition, as a method of confirming the information related to the entry outside the gaming machine, it may be confirmed using a collator. Specifically, a terminal for connecting the collator to the main control board M side is provided. Thus, by connecting a collator to the terminal, a serial signal from the main control board M side to the collator side (similar to the command transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the type of information and the information A signal that can clearly indicate the content may be output. The serial signal may be configured to be output at all times by the main control board M, or may be configured to be output when there is an output request for information related to the entry from the collator.

  Further, as another form of confirming information relating to the entry by the collator, the information relating to the entry is managed on the sub-control board S side, and the information relating to the entry on the sub-control board S side. It is good also as a structure which can confirm the information which concerns on a ball | bowl with a collator by making QR code and displaying with the effect display apparatus SG, image | photographing and decoding the said QR code with a collator.

(Fifth embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, various aspects for confirming information relating to the entry have been described in detail, but the information relating to the entry is configured so that it can be stored for several days. Also good. Therefore, a configuration capable of storing information related to entering a ball for several days is referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 89 is an overall electrical configuration diagram in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the sub-main control unit SM has a real-time clock RTC that keeps counting the current time with a built-in power supply. Is. Here, the real time clock RTC is a mechanism for measuring time provided on the substrate of the sub main control unit SM. The real-time clock RTC has a built-in power supply (battery) that is independent of the board, and keeps timing while power is not being supplied to the gaming machine. Based on the current date and time.

  Next, FIG. 90 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the fifth embodiment. The change from the first modification from the third embodiment is Step 2650 (fifth). That is, after the main control board M executes the prize ball payout command transmission control process in step 3000, the main control board M executes the backup execution control process in step 2650 (fifth). Shift to signal output processing.

  Next, FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the backup execution control process according to the subroutine of Step 2650 (fifth) of FIG. 90 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2652, the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10000) (the total discharge confirmation counter value is cleared to zero when the power is turned off. Therefore, the total discharge confirmation number counter value that has been measured since the power is turned on, that is, the base value is not stored when the number of game balls fired does not reach 10,000). In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the main control board M determines whether or not the date has been newly changed. In the case of Yes in step 2654, the main control board M sets the next storage area in step 2656 and proceeds to step 2658. In the case of No in step 2654, the process proceeds to step 2658. Next, at step 2658, the main control board M updates the current base value to the set storage area number and stores it (updated and stored until the last power-off of today, and the last power-off). Time data will be stored for three days), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1990). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2652, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1990).

  The lower part of the figure is a base value storage image diagram. Specifically, it has “1”, “2”, and “3” as storage area numbers, and “3” as a storage area number in the left table. "Is set. Further, the base value for March 25 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “1”, and the base value for March 27 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “2”. The base value of March 28 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “3”. After that, the number of game balls fired on March 29 the next day (the number of game balls being almost the same as the number of discharged balls) became 10,000 or more, and the date was changed from March 28 The storage area number is changed from “3” to “1” (“1” is set), and the base value (33) for March 29 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “1”. Become. The storage area numbers are set in the order of “1 → 2 → 3 → 1...”. Further, the March 25 base value stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “1” is deleted (overwritten). It should be noted that the configuration for backing up the information related to the entry such as the base value is not limited to this, and for example, the next storage area number may be set each time the gaming machine is powered on. . Further, it may be configured to have a counter for managing the storage area to be backed up, and each time the gaming machine power is turned on, 1 is added to the counter value of the counter.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the base value is updated and stored as needed on business days when the total number of discharges is 10,000 balls or more, so that the predetermined number or more It is possible to store information for three days on business days on which (10000 balls or more) has been launched.

  In the fifth embodiment, the RTC is used. However, with this configuration, it is possible to easily determine how many game balls are fired at what time.

In the fifth embodiment, the backup is executed on the condition that the total number of discharges reaches a predetermined number (10000 balls in this example). However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is related to the entry. What is necessary is just to comprise so that the backup of information may be performed, and even if it changes predetermined conditions, there is no problem. For example, a predetermined time may have elapsed as a period during which a game is being executed, a predetermined number or more of game balls may have been fired, or the cumulative number of prize balls to be paid may have reached a predetermined number. Further, the backed up information may be deleted by elapse of a predetermined period or execution of a predetermined operation. Specifically, as a predetermined operation for deleting backed up information, the backed up information at the time of power-off may be deleted, or the backed-up information at the time of power-off recovery may be deleted.
(Sixth embodiment)
In the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the configuration in which the process for calculating the information related to the entry is executed by either the main control board M or the sub control board S has been described in detail. Information relating to the incoming ball may be calculated in any processing of the control board M and the sub-control board S. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 92 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is Step 2750 (sixth). That is, after executing the number-of-entry determination process in step 2100, in step 2750 (sixth), the main control board M executes a main game discharge number confirmation process, and proceeds to the fraud detection information management process in step 1900. .

  Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the main game start entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of Step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 2212-3, step 2212-5 (sixth), step 2231-3, and step 2231-5 (sixth). That is, after the first main game start port detection continuation flag is turned on in step 2210, in step 2212-3, the first main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-A counts the start entrance ball number counter MJ12c. Add 1 to the value. Next, in step 2212-5 (sixth), the first main game starting port entrance determining means MJ11-A sets a starting port entering command (command to the sub-control board S side). Transition to processing.

  In step 2230, after the second main game start port detection continuation flag is turned on, in step 2231-3, the second main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-B sets the start entrance pitch counter MJ12c. Add 1 to the counter value. Next, in step 2231-5 (sixth), the second main game start opening entry determining means MJ11-B sets a start opening entering command (command to the sub-control board S side). Transition to processing.

  Next, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of a general winning opening entrance detection process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is Step 2411-3 and Step 2411-5 (sixth). That is, after turning on the general winning opening detection continuation flag in step 2410, in step 2411-3, the general winning opening entering determination means MJ11-P adds 1 to the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ13c. Next, in step 2411-5 (sixth), the general winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-P sets a general winning command (command to the sub-control board S side), and proceeds to the processing of step 2420. .

  Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is Step 2509-5 (sixth). That is, after adding 1 to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90 in step 2508, in step 2509-5 (sixth), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 outputs a discharge ball command (sub control board). (Command to S side) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the ball entering determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2100 in FIG. 92 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2104 (sixth), that is, after calculating the total number of balls entered G in step 2102, the maintenance mode control means MO in step 2104 (sixth) It is determined whether or not the number of balls G has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (6000 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2104 (sixth), the entrance ratio N is calculated in step 2106, and in the case of No in step 2104, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (sixth) process}. By comprising in this way, whenever the sum total of the number of balls entered into the start opening and the general prize opening reaches a multiple of 6000 balls, an indication whether or not the ball entering ratio is within a predetermined range Can be executed.

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of main game discharge number confirmation processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (sixth) in FIG. 92 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2752, the maintenance mode control means MO determines that the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is a confirmation value (the total discharge number measured on the main control board M side and the total discharge calculated on the sub control board S side). It is a counter value for confirming whether the number is the same. In this example, it is determined whether or not a multiple of 6000) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the maintenance mode control means MO makes a total discharge ball check command (a command to the sub-control board S side and includes information related to the total discharge check number counter value). Is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1900). Even in the case of No in step 2752, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 98 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 5850 (sixth), step 5950 (sixth), and step 6050 (sixth) in FIG. That is, in step 5850 (sixth), the sub control board S executes a sub game entry check process described later. Next, in step 5950 (sixth), the sub control board S executes a sub game incoming ball number determination process described later. Next, in step 6050 (sixth), the sub control board S executes a sub game side discharge number confirmation process to be described later, and proceeds to a hold information management process in step 5100.

  Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the secondary game entry ball confirmation process according to the subroutine of step 5850 (sixth) in FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 5852, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a start opening ball command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5852, in step 5854, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the sub-side start opening ball number counter SJ11c (the first main game start opening A10 or under the specific situation from the main control board M side). This is a counter that performs addition processing based on information relating to the number of game balls that have entered the second main game start opening B10 and is stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S). , The process proceeds to step 5856. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5852, the process proceeds to step 5856. Next, at step 5856, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a general ball entry command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5856, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 relates to the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening P10 under the specific circumstances from the sub-side general entry number counter SJ13c (main control board M side). 1 is added to the counter value (which is stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), and the process proceeds to Step 5860. On the other hand, also in the case of step 5856 No, the process proceeds to step 5860.

  Next, in step 5860, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a discharge ball command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5860, in step 5862, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines the sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter SJ10c (based on the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s from the main control board M side). 1 is added to the counter value of the counter for executing the addition process (stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), and the process proceeds to the next process {step 5950 (sixth) process}. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5860, the process proceeds to the next process {step 5950 (sixth) process}. By configuring in this way, when the start entrance command, the general entrance command, and the discharge ball command are received from the main control board M side, the start entrance (first main game) on the sub control board S side is received. It is possible to perform addition processing on the counter values of the counter related to the entrance to the start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10), the counter related to the entrance to the general winning opening P, and the counter related to the discharge ball It becomes possible.

  Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the secondary game incoming ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 5950 (sixth) in FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 5952, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 executes an addition process of the counter value of the sub-side starting entrance ball number counter SJ11c and the counter value of the sub-side general ball number counter SJ13c, and the total number of balls entered GS is calculated. Next, in step 5954, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the total number of balls entered GS has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (1500). In the case of Yes in step 5954, in step 5956, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 calculates (the sub-side start port entrance number counter value / sub-side general entrance number counter value) as the entrance ratio NS. Although details will be described later, the total number of entered balls G on the main control board M side is determined every 6000 balls, whereas the total number of entered balls GS on the sub-control board S side is 1500 balls. And the sub-control board S side is configured so that the determination interval is shorter (the number of determinations is greater).

  Next, in step 5958, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the entrance ratio NS is within a predetermined range (1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4). In the case of Yes in step 5958, in step 5960, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays a normal display on the effect display device SG (for example, small ○ is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area, nothing is displayed, etc.). Then, the process proceeds to {the process of step 6050 (sixth)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5958, in step 5962, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays an abnormal display on the effect display device SG (for example, a small x is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area), and the next processing The process proceeds to {Step 6050 (sixth) process}. Also in the case of No in step 5954, the processing proceeds to the next processing {step 6050 (sixth) processing}.

  Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the secondary game side discharge number confirmation processing according to the subroutine of Step 6050 (sixth) in FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 6052, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a discharge confirmation command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 6052, in step 6054, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not “total discharge confirmation number counter value = sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter value”. In the case of Yes in Step 6054, in Step 6056, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the normal discharge display on the effect display device, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 5100). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6054, in step 6058, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays a discharge abnormality display on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). In the case of No in step 6052, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5100). Thus, in the sixth embodiment, every time 6000 discharged balls are detected on the main control board M side, the detection on the main control board M side coincides with the detection on the sub control board S side. Is configured to check if That is, the main control board M side and the sub control board S side are configured to measure the discharge balls independently.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, the main control board M and the sub control board S execute the process of calculating the information related to entering, respectively, and the total number of discharges is Each time a predetermined number (6000 balls in this example) is reached, the total number of discharges measured by the main control board M and the information transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side are used. By confirming whether or not the total number of discharged balls calculated on the control substrate S side matches, it is possible to check whether the information related to the incoming ball is correct information. In addition, since the sub-control board S uses a larger data capacity than the main control board M, the processing on the main control board M side updates the information related to entering every 6000 balls. In the process on the side of the sub control board S, the information related to the entrance is updated every 1500 balls, which is smaller than that on the side of the main control board M, so that the information related to the entrance can be confirmed more finely. .

  In addition, every time the total number of discharges reaches a predetermined number (6000 balls in this example), the main control board M and the sub control board S are configured to check the information related to entering the ball on the main control board M side. It may be configured to determine whether or not the total discharge confirmation number counter value matches the total number of balls entered GS on the sub-control board S side. By configuring in this way, in order not to detect information related to illegal entry due to illegally changing the direction of the game nail (for example, information where the entrance ratio N is in an abnormal range), When a rod-shaped member is taken in and out in the vicinity of the general winning entrance entrance detection device P11s and the general winning entrance entrance detection device P11s repeats “off → on”, the main control board M side to the sub control board S side Is sent to the general winning opening P10, the total pitch number GS on the sub-control board S side is added, but the main control is performed. Since the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s does not detect a game ball on the substrate M side, information (total discharge confirmation number counter value) relating to the total discharge number on the main control board M side is not added, and the bar-shaped Parts When out around 般入 Prize port ball entrance detecting device P11s becomes the total emission number of main control board M side and the total inlet ball number of the sub-control board S side fraud is discovered to not match.

(Seventh embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the sixth embodiment, various configurations for confirming information related to entering a ball have been described in detail, but in order to cheat such information, for example, information related to an abnormally entered ball If this is confirmed, there is a risk that the RAM is cleared and erased without storing the abnormal information. Therefore, a configuration capable of taking countermeasures even in such a situation is referred to as a seventh embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 102 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 6100 (seventh) in FIG. That is, after executing the error notification execution process in step 5700, in step 6100 (seventh), the sub control board S executes a RAM clear backup process to be described later, and proceeds to the process of step 5020.

  Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of RAM clear backup processing according to the subroutine of Step 6100 (seventh) in FIG. 102 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 6102, the sub control board S determines whether or not the RAM clear information from the main control board M side has been received. If YES in step 6102, in step 6104, the sub-main control unit SM adds 1 to the counter value of the RAM clear count counter SRc, stores the counter value, and performs the next process (process of step 5020). Migrate to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6102, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5020). As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the number of times the RAM is cleared is stored on the sub-control board S side. It should be noted that the area for storing the counter value of the RAM clear count counter SRc in step 6104 is not subject to any artificial operation (the power switch Ea or the RAM clear button is operated to generate a power cut or RAM clear). In other words, the region is not erased (for example, a ferroelectric memory).

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, by configuring the sub-control board S to store the number of times the RAM has been cleared, information related to abnormal entry Even if the RAM clear is executed and stored without storing the abnormal information, the RAM clear execution count is stored on the sub control board S side and the RAM clear is executed. However, by configuring so that the number of times of RAM clear execution is not erased, it is possible to configure so that unauthorized information operations cannot be performed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the number of RAM clears stored in the sub control board S may be displayed on the effect display device SG during the execution of the maintenance mode, and such a configuration is possible. In such a case, if the number of RAM clears to be displayed exceeds a predetermined number of times, it is determined that an illegal RAM clear is being executed, and display of effects and the like cannot be displayed on the effect display device SG. (All the displays related to the progress of the game cannot be displayed and cannot be used at the time of business). Further, the RTC described above may be used to store not only the number of times the RAM is cleared but also the date and time when the RAM is cleared.

(Eighth embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the information related to the entry is calculated by the main control board M, and the configuration for displaying the information on the main control board M based on the calculated information has been described in detail. The configuration for executing all information calculation and display processing on the main control board M is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, the configuration different from the present embodiment is configured as the configuration for executing all the calculation and display processing of information relating to the entry by the main control board M, and hereinafter, only the differences from the present embodiment will be described. Detailed description.

  First, FIG. 104 is an example of a diagram illustrating a structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the ball entry state display device J10 is provided on the main control board M. This entry state display device J10 is attached with a 4-digit 7-segment display aligned in “2 digits + 2 digits”. For example, a continuous character ratio or a character ratio described later, or a total of them is displayed. It is configured to be displayable. The entrance state display device J10 in the figure is provided on the surface of the main control board M on the back side of the gaming machine, and the door unit D18 is unlocked with a key possessed by the game hall side. Since it is necessary to open D18 and check the boards attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check the board.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 105 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the eighth embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 1034 (eighth), step 2850 (eighth), and step 1036 (eighth). That is, after executing the processing of step 2000 to step 1600 as the processing in the first ROM / RAM area, in step 1034 (eighth), the main control board M calls the processing in the second ROM / RAM area.

<Processing in the second ROM / RAM area>
Next, in step 2850 (eighth), the main control board M executes a ball entry state calculation process, which will be described later, which is a process in the second ROM / RAM area. Next, in step 1036 (eighth), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM / RAM area, and thereafter, the processing of step 1900 to step 1990 is executed as processing in the first ROM / RAM area. It will be.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2700 in FIG. 9 in the eighth embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 2706-6 (eighth), step 2716-6 (eighth), step 2731 (eighth), and step 2736-6 (eighth). That is, in step 2704, the winning ball payout determining means MH adds the winning ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting port to the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc, and then in step 2706. -6 (eighth), the winning ball payout determining means MH enters the non-compete counter value MHc-4 (the first main game starting port A10 not provided with the electric accessory and the general winning port P10) The number of game balls played and stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side) is added to the number of prize balls paid out for the first main game start port (3 in this example). Then, the process proceeds to step 2708.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
In step 2714, the winning ball payout determining means MH adds the winning ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting port to the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc, and then in step 2716. -6 (eighth), the winning ball payout determining means MH receives the accessory counter value MHc-5 (a counter for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the second main game start opening B20 provided with the electric accessory) The number of prize balls paid out for the second main game starting port (3 in this example) is added to the counter value (stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side), and the process proceeds to step 2718. To do. In step 2728, the prize ball payout determining means MH temporarily stores in the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb information indicating that the prize ball relating to the first (second) big prize opening is paid out. In step 2731 (eighth), the winning ball payout determining means MH counts the consecutive game counter value MHc-6 (the number of game balls that have entered the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20). And the number of prize balls to be paid out for the first (second) big prize opening (13 in this example) is added to the main control board M side RAM area). Transition.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
In step 2734, the winning ball payout determination means MH adds the winning ball payout number (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc, and then in step 2736-6 ( In 8), the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize ball payouts (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the non-object counter value MHc-4. Transition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate an after-mentioned combination ratio and a continuous combination ratio. The prize ratio refers to the number of prize balls paid out by the big prize opening for all prize balls paid out and the prize by the prize opening provided with the ordinary electric accessory (in this example, the second main game start opening B10). In this example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the first major winning port C10 (second major winning port C20), and the general winning port P10. The total number of winning ball payouts of the second main game starting port B10 and the first big winning port C10 (second big winning port C20) occupies the total number of winning ball payouts. In addition, the consecutive character ratio is the ratio of the number of prize ball payouts by the big prize opening to the total number of prize ball payouts, and in this example, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10. And the number of prize balls paid out in the first big prize opening C10 (second big prize opening C20) with respect to the total number of prize balls paid out in the first grand prize opening C10 (second big prize opening C20) and the general prize opening P10. It is a proportion. Strictly speaking, the consecutive character ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by the big prize opening when the condition device operation flag is on to the total number of prize balls paid out. In the case of calculating the consecutive character ratio as described above, two ring buffers for storing the number of winning ball payouts of the big winning opening are provided, and the condition device operation flag is on in one of the ring buffers. The number of prize balls paid out by the big prize opening (the number of prize balls delivered by the big hit) is stored, and the other ring buffer has the number of prize balls paid out by the big prize opening when the condition device operation flag is off (by the small hit) It may be configured to calculate (store) the consecutive character ratio by storing (the number of prize balls paid out).

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the eighth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that this embodiment is a non-stochastic game state and a non-time-reduced game state (the main game probability change flag is OFF and the main game time flag is OFF), and a special game is being executed. When the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects a game ball when there is no (conditional device operation flag is OFF), the total discharge confirmation number counter value is incremented by 1 so that the total discharge is performed regardless of the gaming state or the like. When the confirmation sensor C90s detects a game ball, 1 is added to the total discharge confirmation number counter value. Since only the processing is deleted from this embodiment, a detailed description is omitted.

<Processing in the second ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the entering state calculation process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (eighth) in FIG. 105 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 2852, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90 has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (1000 in this example). In the case of Yes in Step 2852, in Step 2854, the maintenance mode control means MO, as an accessory ratio, “(object counter value + continuous accessory counter value) / (object counter value + continuous accessory counter value + non- "Corporate counter value) x 100" is calculated. Next, in Step 2856, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “continuous bonus counter value / (long bonus counter value + continuous bonus counter value) × 100” as the continuous bonus ratio. To do. Next, in Step 2858, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio calculated in Step 2854 and Step 2856 on the entering state display device J10, and the next process {Step 1036 (No. 8)}. Even in the case of No in step 2852, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1036 (eighth)}. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, each time the number of discharges is a multiple of 1000 balls, the combination of the combination of the combination and the combination of the continuous combination is calculated and displayed on the entry state display device J10 in the display mode described later. It is configured as follows. In the eighth embodiment, it is configured to display the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio calculated in step 2854 and step 2856 on the ball entry state display device J10. Because it is rare that the result of calculating the ratio of consecutive items or the ratio of consecutive items becomes an integer, the result of calculating the ratio of consecutive items or the ratio of consecutive items is rounded off to the nearest whole number. You may comprise so that what was made into the integer of a digit may be displayed on the entrance state display apparatus J10.

  Next, FIG. 109 is an entry information backup image diagram in the eighth embodiment. The gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment may be configured to store (back up) information related to the ball whenever a predetermined number of game balls are fired, as in the fifth embodiment described above. An example of such a configuration is shown in FIG. In the figure, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 6000, in other words, every time the total discharge confirmation number counter value becomes a multiple of 6000, information related to the incoming ball is stored. The total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90 is configured to be able to measure when all the game balls that have been discharged are discharged, so when the total discharge confirmation number counter value is a multiple of 6000 balls. Can be considered that game balls are fired at multiples of 6000 balls. In the case of a general pachinko game machine, the number of game balls that are approximately the same as the number of game balls that have been fired are paid out as the total number of game balls to be paid out. Can be regarded as substantially the same as the cumulative number of prize balls paid out. In addition, in a gaming machine configured such that approximately 90% of the number of game balls that have been launched are paid out as the total number of prize balls to be paid out, the total number of prize balls to be paid out is 100/90. The approximate number of game balls fired can be calculated.

  The information related to the entry that the discharged balls store for every 6000 balls includes the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the entry to the general prize opening P10 and the prize based on the entry to the first main game start opening A10. Cumulative number of ball payouts, cumulative number of award ball payouts based on balls entered into the second main game start port B10 (the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is provided), the first big prize port C10, and There are a total of the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry to the second big prize opening C20 and the total number of prize balls paid out of the above four items. It is configured to be stored in the ring buffer using bytes. In this example, a ring buffer capable of storing 10 pieces of information each time the number of discharged balls is a multiple of 6000 balls is used. With 10 pieces of information stored, a new discharged ball of 6000 When the number is a multiple of the sphere, the oldest stored information (information corresponding to “1” in the figure) is deleted, and new information is stored (stored in “1” in the figure). Is configured.

  Further, based on the information stored in the ring buffer described above, information related to the total number of award balls paid out for 10 stored in the ring buffer is stored using 3 bytes. In addition, information older than 10 will be deleted from the ring buffer, but refer to the information at any time before being deleted, and the total number of winnings including the information stored in the past will be displayed. Such information is also stored using 3 bytes. In addition, the continuous feature ratio and the feature ratio of the information relating to the total number of prize ball payouts for 10 pieces, which are calculated based on the information relating to the total number of prize ball payouts for the 10 pieces, , Each using 1 byte. In addition, the consecutive character ratio and the character ratio of the information related to the total cumulative number of winnings, which are calculated based on the information related to the total cumulative winning number, are stored using 1 byte each. . In addition, when three pieces of data are stored as data stored in the ring buffer (when data for one round of the ring buffer is not stored), for example, a prize ball payout relating to the general winning opening P10 When the data of “1: 500 balls, 2: 600 balls, 3: 500 balls” is stored as the number, the data of the total number of paid-out balls of 10 sets related to the general winning opening P10 is “ 500 + 600 + 500 = 1600 balls ”is stored, and the total cumulative award ball payout data is stored as“ 500 + 600 + 500 = 1600 balls ”, and 10 sets of cumulative prizes are stored. The data on the number of balls paid out and the data on the total number of prize balls paid out have the same number of prize balls. On the other hand, when 12 pieces of data are stored as data stored in the ring buffer (when data is stored after the data for one round of the ring buffer is stored), for example, As the number of prize balls to be paid out for the winning opening P10, “1: 500 balls, 2: 600 balls, 3: 500 balls, 4: 600 balls, 5: 500 balls, 6: 700 balls, 7: 500 balls, 8: 600 In the case where the data of “9,500 balls, 10: 400 balls” is stored, the data of the cumulative number of payout balls of 10 sets related to the general winning opening P10 is “500 + 600 + 500 + 600 + 500 + 700 + 500 + 600 + 500 + 400 = 5400 balls”. In addition to the above 5400 balls, the total accumulated prize ball payout data is deleted from the ring buffer. The data of “500 balls” and “800 balls” is added as the data for the past two, that is, the data that “5400 + 500 + 800 = 6700 balls” is stored, and 10 sets of cumulative prize balls The data on the number of payouts and the data on the total number of payout balls are different in the number of prize balls.

  Next, FIG. 110 is a display example of the ball entry state display device in the eighth embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure is an example of the display mode of the ball entry state display device J10 in the eighth embodiment. As described above, the ball entry state display device J10 in the eighth embodiment is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the back side direction of the gaming machine, and the door unit D18 is unlocked with a key possessed by the game hall side. Since it is necessary to lock and open the door unit D18 and check the boards attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check.

  The entry state display device J10 is configured to display 4 bits of upper 2 digits and lower 2 digits, and is configured to start display when the gaming machine is turned on. In addition, the displayed items are (a) the ratio of consecutive actors when 60000 balls are launched, (b) the ratio of actors when 60000 balls are launched, (c) the ratio of consecutive consecutive actors, (d) There are four types of bonuses, and after switching on the power of the gaming machine, it is switched every 10 seconds in the order of “(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a). Four types of items are displayed. The 60000 balls are the number of fired balls for one round of the ring buffer (6000 balls × 10). The above (a) corresponds to the cumulative total of 10 sets of consecutive character ratios stored using 1 byte in FIG. 109, and (b) is stored using 1 byte in FIG. 109. 109 (c) corresponds to the cumulative total of consecutive actor ratios stored using 1 byte in FIG. 109, and (d) in FIG. 109. Corresponds to the total cumulative proportion of features stored using 1 byte.

  As a specific display mode, it suggests which item is currently displayed in the upper two digits, and the ratio of consecutive actors when “C0” fires 60000 balls, “C1” fires 60000 balls In this case, “A0” is a cumulative consecutive feature ratio, and “A1” is a cumulative feature ratio. In addition, the value of the currently displayed item is displayed in% in the lower two digits. In addition, it is configured to display the consecutive character ratio, and when it exceeds 60, the lower two digits display mode is blinked to indicate that it is not a normal value (others In the case it is lit). In addition, when the proportion of an accessory is displayed and exceeds 70, the lower two digits are displayed in a blinking manner to indicate that the value is not normal (other cases) Is lit.) In addition, when the data of 60000 balls launched is not retained, for example, when only 20000 game balls have been launched since the gaming machine started operation, the display mode of the upper 2 digits is displayed as blinking. (It is lit up in other cases). In addition, the item displayed on the entrance state display apparatus J10 is not limited to what was illustrated, and the display mode is merely an example.

  Next, the lower part of the figure is an example of a display mode different from the eighth embodiment of the ball-entry state display device J10. As shown in FIG. The case where a number is displayed is illustrated. In the figure, “non-lighting = 0”, “red light = 1”, “green light = 2” are shown in ternary numbers, and in the example in the figure, “000000100001100” is shown in ternary numbers. Yes. Therefore, in the case of a decimal number, “45963” is displayed, indicating that the number of game balls fired is 45963. As described above, a plurality of lamps capable of representing ternary numbers in three lighting modes may be provided so that display related to entering the entrance is executable. Moreover, you may change the kind and display content of the lighting mode of the entrance state display apparatus J10, for example, it is good also as a display using a threshold value. Specifically, “Continuous character ratio less than 40% → lights off”, “Continuous character ratio 40-49% → green light”, “Continuous character ratio 50-59% → yellow light”, “Continuous character ratio” You may comprise so that it may alert | report in four types of display modes by the value of a continuous character ratio like "60% or more-> red lighting".

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, the ball entry state display device is provided on the main control board M and on the surface in the back side direction of the gaming machine. By executing the calculation processing and display processing of the information related to the entry in the processing in the second ROM / RAM area, the data capacity used in the first ROM / RAM area can be reduced, and the ratio of the bonuses And the consecutive character ratio can be confirmed by the entering state display device, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not the game is progressing in a normal game nail state.

  In the eighth embodiment, a ball entry state display device is provided on the main control board M, and information relating to the ball entry in the ball entry state display device (in this example, an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display the information related to the entry in the 7 segments for error provided on the payout control board. In the case of such a configuration, the display start condition of the information related to the entry may be, for example, a long press of the RAM clear button for a predetermined number of seconds or more. In such a configuration, the display may be switched every predetermined time as in the eighth embodiment. Specifically, when the display is switched every 3 seconds as “1 → 3 → 5 → 2 → 4”, it may be configured to notify that a total of 13524 game balls have been paid out. .

  Next, FIG. 111 is an example of a board surface configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. This figure shows only the right side of the game area, and exemplifies a case where the player performs a right strike (a launch mode in which a game ball is launched toward the right side of the game board surface). In the case of the board configuration as shown in the figure, when the right strike is executed, the game ball is easily guided in the vicinity of the second main game start port B10, and is not guided to the second main game start port B10. The game balls are configured to be guided to the general winning opening P10. That is, when a game ball is launched so as to enter the second main game start opening B10, almost all of the launched game balls are placed in either the second main game start opening B10 or the general winning opening P10. It is configured to be guided. With this configuration, even when the direction of the game nail is illegally changed, or when the direction of the game nail is changed by the collision of the game ball with the game nail, it is advantageous to the player. By making it easy to enter one of the two entrances, a more user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained.

  Further, in the case of such a board surface configuration, by calculating the entrance ratio between the general winning opening P10 and the second main game start opening B10 that can be entered by right-handed, based on the calculated entrance ratio, It can be configured so that it is easy to grasp (analyze) the situation (orientation, etc.) of the game nails around the general winning opening P10 and the second main game start opening B10.

  Further, in addition to the board configuration as shown in the figure, when the first out port and the second out port are provided as the out ports and the second out port is arranged downstream of the general winning port P10 (general winning port) By constructing to calculate the entrance ratio between the general winning opening P10 and the second out-port when the game ball that did not enter P10 flows down to the second out-port) Based on the calculated winning ratio, it is possible to easily grasp (analyze) the situation (direction, etc.) of the game nails around the general winning opening P10.

  Further, a security dongle may be inserted into the gaming machine according to the present example to determine whether or not the information related to the entry is normal. Specifically, it is configured so that it can be determined whether or not the information related to entering the ball is normal by shifting to the security mode, and the board that manages the shift to the security mode (mainly Control board M, sub-control board S, prize ball payout control board KH, etc.) unless a security dongle is inserted (unless the password in the security dongle matches the password managed on the board side) It is configured not to enter mode. By shifting to the security mode, it is possible to transmit information related to the entry into the security dongle as in the above-described verification machine.

  The security dongle has a volatile memory and a power source (for example, a backup battery) that supplies power to the volatile memory. In the volatile memory, as information relating to the entry, information relating to the range in which the entrance ratio of the main game starting opening and the general winning entrance is normal, information relating to the normal range of the accessory ratio, continuous features Information on the normal range of the ratio, information on the normal range of the base value, and the like may be stored. The volatile memory information is preferably encrypted and stored in the security dongle. In that case, the encrypted data is decrypted on the authentication side based on the volatile memory information. It is preferable to be able to configure. Further, the security dongle itself may be configured not to have a power source for supplying power to the volatile memory, but instead to supply the power from the prize ball payout control board side or the main control board M side. (In this case, when the security dongle is removed from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board, the security information may be immediately lost from the volatile memory). When the security dongle is removed from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board, the information in the volatile memory immediately disappears. When writing information to the security dongle, first, the prize ball payout control is performed. Attach a security dongle (before writing) to the board or main control board, turn on the power to the gaming machine, connect an information writing writer to the prize ball payout control board or main control board, and then write Write information to the security dongle from the writer (via the prize ball payout control board or the main control board), and then (remove the writing writer from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board), the prize ball payout control board A backup power source may be supplied to the security dongle from the side or the main control board M side.

  Further, by inserting the security dongle and completing the authentication, and shifting to the security mode, the information related to the entry can be transmitted from the board (for example, the main control board M) to the collator as described above. May be. Further, the security dongle may be inserted to complete the authentication, and the security mode may be entered. Thereafter, the game machine may be configured to enter the security mode by executing a predetermined operation. For example, after the authentication of the security dongle is completed, the security mode may be shifted to the security mode by pressing the sub input button SB three times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so as not to shift to the security mode unless the security dongle is used. Therefore, the player can perform an operation that can be operated by pressing the sub input button SB three times to the security mode. Even in the case of the transition condition, it can be configured that a player who does not have a security dongle cannot be shifted to the security mode. Further, in the case of a gaming machine in which the ball entry state display device J10 is attached to the main control board M as described in the eighth embodiment, the security dongle is inserted and the authentication is completed, and the security mode is set. By making the transition, information relating to the entry is displayed on the entry state display device J10 (the entry state information is not displayed on the entry state display device J10 unless authentication by the security dongle is completed). May be. Further, in the case of a gaming machine in which the entrance state display device J10 is attached to the main control board M as described in the eighth embodiment, the security dongle is inserted and the authentication is completed, and the operation member (for example, , The sub input button SB, the launch handle D44, the RAM clear button, etc.) are operated to shift to the security mode, whereby the information relating to the entry is displayed on the entry state display device J10 (authentication by the security dongle). (The information relating to the entry is not displayed on the entry state display device J10 unless the entry is completed). In addition, the dongle insertion port for inserting the security dongle may be provided at a position where it is difficult to artificially access from the front side (player side) of the gaming machine even if the door unit is opened. Good {The security dongle only needs to be electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board or the main control board. For example, the security dongle is fixed to the board and the board to board (or the prize ball payout control board or the main control board). The connector part corresponding to the dongle insertion port is pulled out from the control board with a harness and the security dongle is connected to the connector part) (in addition, it is enclosed in the board case and crimped) to improve security. In this case, there is no need to provide a dongle insertion slot. Artificial access to the guru becomes difficult}.

  Further, in this example, one out port C80 is provided, and a game ball that has entered the out port C80 can be detected by the out port entrance detecting device C80s. However, a plurality of out ports may be provided. Good. For example, it is configured to provide a total of two out ports, one at the same position as the present embodiment (referred to as Out port A) and one on the right side of the board (referred to as Out port B). A device for detecting a game ball may be provided in each of the two outlets so that the game ball that has entered the out port A and the game ball that has entered the out port B can be measured. With such a configuration, it is possible to generate more detailed information relating to the flow of the game ball. That is, even when it is determined that the winning ratio of the main game start opening and the general winning opening is not normal when the general winning opening is provided on both the left and right sides of the game board surface as in this embodiment. It cannot be determined whether the state of entering the general winning opening provided on the left side of the game board is abnormal or whether the state of entering the general winning opening provided on the right side of the gaming board is abnormal. Even in such a case, if the direction of the game nail located in the vicinity of the general prize opening provided on the right side of the game board is illegally changed and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the general prize opening In other words, which game nails are difficult to enter by configuring the game balls that have not entered the general prize opening to be easy to enter the out slot B, in other words, which game nails It can be configured so that it is easy to determine whether the orientation of the image has been illegally changed.

  Next, FIGS. 112 to 114 show the count related to the entry, the calculation of the information related to the entry, and the information related to the entry as the configuration relating to the entry related information in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows the matter which can be done, and its method. As long as these items can be combined with each other, the combined mode is included in the contents of this embodiment, and the mode having two or more items in each classification is also included in this embodiment. Shall be. Specifically, the large items are classified into 13 items A to M, and each has a plurality of small items as subordinate concepts of the large items. In the remarks column, detailed explanations, measurement (count), calculation, and display reasons for the corresponding sub-items, specific examples thereof, and the like are shown. Although described in detail below, the present embodiment is not limited to the modes that can be assumed from this list.

First, a major item shown in the upper left of FIG. As subordinate concepts of the game ball count period (a period during which the number of game balls entering the various entrances is counted), there are the following small items.
A1. Counting at any time: It is not limited to the period in which the maintenance mode is executed, and the number of incoming game balls is counted at any time during the period in which the maintenance mode is not executed.
A2. Counting only during maintenance mode: The number of incoming game balls is counted only during the period in which the maintenance mode is executed. Note that it may be the entire period during execution of the maintenance mode, or a predetermined period during execution of the maintenance mode.
A3. Each business day or designated business period: Although it is configured so that game balls can be counted even during a period when maintenance mode is not being executed, only the designated date and time (period) can be counted, and the designated date and time ( It may be configured not to count other than (period). Note that the determination as to whether or not it is the designated period may be made using the RTC. For example, when the business hours of the hall are from 9:00 to 23:00, the business hours are set in the RTC (the business hours differ depending on the business area, so the setting may be changed by operating the sub input button or the like. It is also possible to display the number of winning balls per unit time (preventing adjustment of the base value in the hall). For example, when the business hours are from 9:00 to 23:00, it is possible to set the hours outside business hours and monitor the entrance to various winning openings outside the business hours. In addition, the number of entrances to various entrances per unit time outside the business hours (for example, every 10 minutes outside the business hours) may be individually manageable. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to find out a short time base value adjustment by the maintenance of a game ball by a person in charge of a hall, for example.

Next, B. As a subordinate concept of the measurement mode of information related to entrance (measurement mode when measuring information related to the entrance of game balls to various entrances), there are the following small items.
B1. Predetermined operation on the sub input button: The maintenance mode can be activated and operated by operating the sub input button. For example, measurement is started by pressing the sub input button, and the sub input button is pressed again. It is good also as ending measurement by.
B2. Predetermined operation on the launch handle: For example, a measurement is started by starting a predetermined operation (eg, touching, rotating, etc.) on the launch handle, and then finishing the operation of the launch handle. It is good also as ending. The measurement may be started after the operation is continued for a certain time, or the measurement stop may be suspended for a certain time after the operation is finished.
B3. Period during which game balls are flowing down in the game area: For example, the measurement period can be determined by providing a sensor that can determine whether or not game balls are flowing down in the game area.
B4. When the total number of discharged balls confirmed exceeds a predetermined value: For example, when a predetermined value is exceeded (during a predetermined time, business day, business week, etc.), the data may be stored. In addition, not only the total number of balls to be confirmed, but also save the data when the number of balls that can be counted, such as the total number of balls entered, the number of passes through the outlet, and the number of balls entered in the winning mouth exceeds a predetermined value. It is good.

Next, a major item, C.I. There are the following sub-items as subordinate concepts of the entry-related count target type (classification related to the entrance that can be counted).
C1. Number of balls entering the first main game start opening: When calculating the K7 bonus ratio described later, the number of prize balls by the electric bonus is not a target. In addition, in calculating the K8 consecutive combination ratio, which will be described later, it is not a target of the number of prize balls by the combination apparatus.
C2. Number of balls entered into the second main game start opening: When calculating the K7 bonus component ratio described later, this is a target for the number of prize balls by the electric bonus. In addition, in calculating the K8 consecutive combination ratio, which will be described later, it is not a target of the number of prize balls by the combination apparatus.
C3. Number of balls entered into the big prize opening: When calculating the K7 bonus rate described later, this is a target for the number of prize balls due to the electrical bonus. In addition, when calculating the K8 consecutive combination ratio, which will be described later, it is a target of the number of prize balls by the combination apparatus.
C4. Number of balls entered into the general winning opening: When calculating the K7 bonus ratio described later, the number of prize balls by the electric bonus is not a target. In addition, in calculating the K8 consecutive combination ratio, which will be described later, it is not a target of the number of prize balls by the combination apparatus.
C5. Total number of balls entered: The total number of balls entered into the gaming machine, which can be confirmed, for example, by measuring the number of activations of the device for launching game balls and the total number of balls discharged.
C6. Number of balls in out mouth: Detectable by an out mouth ball detecting device. In addition, it is good also as providing a plurality of out mouths and out mouth entrance detecting devices.

Next, D., which is a major item. There are the following sub-items as subordinate concepts of the gaming state to be counted (classification relating to the state of a specific gaming state and whether or not a special game is being executed).
D1. All gaming states: Regardless of the current gaming state (for example, whether it is a time-saving gaming state or whether a special game is being executed), it is counted. Note that data may be stored only when there is a game exceeding a certain time.
D2. Probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state: During the maintenance mode, the gaming state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D3. Probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game state: The game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button) during the maintenance mode.
D4. Non-stochastic game state and time-reduced game state: During the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D5. Non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state: Only the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state) may be counted. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which makes the counting object separately two game states, also a game state (it also calls a specific game state) other than a normal game state and a normal game state. In the maintenance mode, the gaming state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D6. During execution of special game: During the maintenance mode, even if the special game is not being executed, it can be forcibly changed to the state in which the special game is being executed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button). Good.
D7. No special game is being executed: In the maintenance mode, even if the special game is being executed, it can be forcibly changed to a state where the special game is not being executed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button). Also good.

Next, E. is a major item. As a subordinate concept of a confirmation method (a method for confirming counting, calculation, and stored data from the outside, which is information relating to a game ball), there are the following small items.
E1. Confirmation with collator connected to external terminal: A dedicated machine (for example, collator) may be connected to the external terminal to read information (for example, write verification information such as the number of payouts in a specific RAM area). . In this case, it is good also as a structure which does not have a maintenance mode. Note that the security dongle may be used to encrypt information in the volatile memory to enhance security.
E2. Confirmation with the entry state display device on the main control board M side: All are calculated by the program inside the gaming machine and displayed on the peripheral device.
E3. Confirmation with the effect display device on the side of the sub-control board S: All are calculated by the program inside the gaming machine and displayed on the peripheral device.

Next, F. is a major item shown in the upper left of FIG. As a subordinate concept of the counting method {a method for confirming the number of balls entered or discharged (including a case where the number of balls entered or discharged is considered)}, there are the following small items.
F1. Entrance sensors provided at various entrances: The first (second) main game start entrance entrance detection device, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device, the general entrance entrance entrance detection device, etc. Entry can be detected. Note that a plurality of entrances may be provided, and may be counted individually or combined.
F2. Total discharge confirmation sensor: A sensor that detects all the game balls that have entered the various entrances and passed through the out entrances.
F3. Payout count sensor: a sensor provided continuously downstream of the prize ball payout unit, and measures the number of game balls paid out to the player.
F4. Sensor that detects that the firing handle is in operation: a sensor that can detect that the firing handle is in operation. Based on the time calculated by the internal timer by sensor detection, the base value, the number of shot balls, and the like may be determined.
F5. Number of times the launching device is fired: For example, the internal counter detects the number of times the game ball is fired from the launching device.
F6. Sensor for recognizing the strength of launching a game ball: For example, as the strength of launch, it is possible to determine right strike (strong), left strike (weak), and the number of shot balls (or the number of discharged balls) A sensor capable of measurement may be provided. Based on the measurement result of the sensor, it is possible to calculate information related to the ball entry such as the base value.

Next, G. is a major item. The subordinate concept of the operator (maintenance mode operator) includes the following sub-items.
G1. Examiner: A person who confirms whether the direction of the game nail is normal, etc., and a person who mainly uses the collator and the maintenance mode. For example, an inspection implementer of an amusement machine manufacturer, an inspector of a mechanism, an inspector of a competent authority, etc.
G2. Hall manager: A person who can open the door unit and operate the back of the gaming machine in the maintenance mode.
G3. Player: A person who can only perform operations that anyone can operate.

Next, H. is a major item. As subordinate concepts of the maintenance mode activation method and operation method (operation at the time of maintenance activation and operation method such as display selection after activation), there are the following small items.
H1. Sub input button: Can be activated and operated by the player. It should be noted that after the maintenance mode that cannot be activated by the player is activated, an operation in the maintenance mode may be enabled by inputting a sub input button.
H2. Door unit opening + sub input button: Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the sub input button, the player cannot start and operate.
H3. Opening of door unit + operation of launching handle: Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the launching handle, the player cannot start and operate. It can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine.
H4. Opening the door unit + operating the buttons on the main control board M (RAM clear button, etc.): Opening the door unit and operating the buttons on the main control board M will display the maintenance mode, so the player will start And can not operate. It is preferable that the game machine can be operated from the back side and cannot be operated from the front side of the game machine.
H5. Opening the door unit + Entering the entrance at the time of invalid winning: When entering a big winning entrance when a special game is not being executed, etc. Even if the game is opened, the maintenance mode is not displayed even if a game ball is entered at the entrance that is not an invalid prize.
H6. When passwords and the like are matched: This is a condition in which the player cannot start and operate the maintenance mode, and even a hall related person cannot start unless the passwords and the like are matched. Note that the password may be changed in a predetermined period (for example, day of the week, etc.).

Next, I.I. As a subordinate concept of an area for executing processing (an area for processing information relating to a game ball), there are the following small items.
I1. Detection of winning is executed on the main control board M side: The information on the number of winnings may be transmitted to the sub control board, and the base value may be calculated and displayed on the sub control board S side.
I2. Calculation of information related to entering a ball is executed on the main control board M side: Winning number information (for example, the number of passing through each winning port switch) and a payout number are displayed on a display on the main control board M side. In addition, it is good also as using the area | region (for example, 2nd program) which is not used at the time of normal game progress.
I3. Calculation of information related to entering is executed on the sub-control board S side: The display mode on the display on the main control board M-side may be different between the normal game progress and the maintenance mode display (for example, (The amount of information that can be displayed, such as full-color display, may be increased.)
I4. The calculation result of the information relating to the entry is displayed on the main control board M side: displayed on the entry state display device. The main game symbol display device and the auxiliary game symbol display device can also be displayed in a mode (for example, color display, blinking display, etc.) different from that during normal game progress.
I5. The calculation result of the information related to the entry is displayed on the sub-control board S side: displayed on the effect display device. In addition, it is good also as providing the 1st effect display device and the 2nd effect display device as an effect display device, and displaying the information regarding entrance into a ball with the 2nd effect display device. The second effect display device is, for example, an effect display device having a display area narrower than the first effect display device in the display area, and is displayed on the first effect display device, for example, in the display target. It is good also as an aspect which can display a display thing different from the decoration design, hold image, and error display image which are obtained.
I6. Computation of information related to entering the ball is executed on the main control board M side and the sub control board S side respectively. It is also possible to collate the computation results of both and detect an error (in this case, the main control board M side and The counting period on the sub-control board S side may be different).
I7. Calculation of information related to entering a ball is performed by processing in the second ROM / RAM area of the main control board: winning detection, calculation, or display may be performed in an area that is not used during normal game progression.
I8. Display processing of the calculation result of information related to entering a ball is performed by processing in the second ROM / RAM area of the main control board: detection, calculation or display of winning is performed in an area not used during normal game progress Good

Next, J., a major item. As a subordinate concept of a method for measuring time (a method for measuring a period as a reference unit of information related to entering a ball), there are the following small items.
J1. Interrupt timer: Timer measurement processing is provided in interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals.
J2. Clocks outside the gaming machine (for example, wristwatch, stopwatch): The inspector himself / herself measures the time, not the timer in the gaming machine.
J3. RTC: Timer measurement is performed using RTC.

Next, K. is a major item shown in the upper left of FIG. The subordinate concept of the maintenance mode display target (information relating to the game ball that can be displayed during the maintenance mode) includes the following small items.
K1. Base value: For example, the base value at the time of starting the maintenance mode may be displayed, the base value for a predetermined period during the start of the maintenance mode may be displayed, or the base value only for a specific gaming state may be displayed.
K2. Pitch ratio between the main game start opening and the general winning opening: For example, whether it is normal or abnormal may be displayed at a predetermined timing (a predetermined total number of emissions, a total number of winnings, etc.).
K3. Number of balls entered at the start opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening: The number of balls entered at the starting opening, the general winning opening, and the large winning opening only in a specific gaming state may be displayed.
K4. Number of winning balls at the starting opening, general winning opening, and big winning opening: The number of starting balls at the starting opening, general winning opening, and big winning opening only in a specific gaming state may be displayed.
K5. Total number of winnings: The total number of winnings at start-up, general winnings, and big winnings.
K6. Total number of discharge confirmations: Synonymous with the number of all game balls that have been fired, and is the counter value of the total number of discharge confirmations counter.
K7. Ratio of prizes: This is the ratio of the number of prize balls by the prize winning opening (in this example, the second main game start opening) provided with a large winning opening and electric winnings for all the winning ball numbers.
K8. Consecutive character ratio: This is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the big prize opening to all prize balls.
K9. Number of fired balls: The number of all game balls fired.

Next, L. As a subordinate concept of the maintenance mode display method (method of displaying information relating to the game ball during the maintenance mode), there are the following sub-items.
L1. Entrance state display device (main control board M side): Displayed in 7 segments on the board surface (× 2 in this example).
L2. Effect display device (sub control board S side): A second effect display device may be provided and displayed.
L3. Dedicated display on the prize ball payout control board: The player cannot visually recognize (for example, a 7-segment display).
L4. Dedicated display on the main control board: The player cannot visually recognize (for example, a 7-segment display, 7 segments × 4 in this example).
L5. 1st (2nd) main game symbol display device: Only in the maintenance mode, it may be possible to light in a specific mode as a specific lamp lighting mode.
L6. Auxiliary game symbol display device: Only in the maintenance mode, the specific lamp may be lit in a specific mode.
L7. Frame decoration lamp (may also be used as a game effect lamp D26): Various lighting modes may be used depending on lamps that can be lit in three or more lighting modes (for example, special charts and general prize opening winnings that vary depending on the gaming state) The ratio is notified by the light emission mode). By comprising in that way, much information can be alert | reported as information which concerns on a ball entry.
L8. Voice: You may be notified by voice of whether the information related to entering the ball is normal or abnormal. Note that the volume or the like may be different between a normal case and an abnormal case.

M. is a major item. As a subordinate concept of the backup mode (a mode for storing information relating to the game ball), there are the following small items.
M1. Backup of information such as the number of winnings only when a predetermined condition is satisfied: As a predetermined condition, for example, a day when there are more than 10,000 balls fired, a day when there are more than 6000 balls discharged, and a handle operation for a predetermined time , A predetermined number of out-port detected balls, a predetermined number of winning-port entrance balls, and the like.
M2. Regardless of whether the conditions are met, backup for a certain period of time: sequential overwriting and updating may be performed.
M3. The erased data on the main control board M side is backed up on the sub control board S side: for example, it may be stored in the FRWM on the sub control board S side.
M4. No backup: Information such as the number of winnings may be cleared when power is restored.
M5. When new information is saved, it is erased from old information: for example, it may be backed up using a ring buffer.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine in this example may have the following configuration. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may have in combination the structure explained in full detail below.

  In order to prevent cases where the person in charge of the hall adjusts the base value such as the number of winnings outside the business hours (for example, manually entering the game ball into the general winning opening, etc.), for example, the sub-control board On the S side, the number of winnings per unit time may be stored.

  Further, for each day of the week or date, the password that is verified when the maintenance mode is activated may be changed, and the maintenance mode may be activated (displayed) only when the input key matches the verification key.

  A configuration may be adopted in which the information relating to the incoming ball is totaled on both the main control board M side and the sub control board S side, and whether or not there is any wrinkle in both the tabulation results. In this case, counting is performed every hour on the main control board M side, and on the other hand, counting is performed every 15 minutes on the sub control board S side, and counting is performed on the sub control board S side and the main control board M side. You may comprise so that a period may differ. For example, if the sub-control board S side is counted in a shorter period than the main control board M side, the number of incoming balls etc. increases in a short time on the sub-control board S side. Or a decrease, it becomes a judgment criterion that some kind of adjustment or fraud may have been implemented quickly. Since the capacity of the sub-control board S is larger, even when the counting period is shortened, it is difficult to cause a capacity problem in storing the number of winnings per unit period.

  You may comprise so that the information data concerning the intrusion erase | eliminated by the main control board | substrate M side may be preserve | saved in FRWM of the sub control board | substrate S side. By configuring in this way, the person in charge at the game hall can no longer erase and adjust the data, for example, by removing the battery or making a short circuit, etc. in order to adjust the incoming ball or the like.

  While the game ball is being launched {for example, a period during which the firing handle D44 is on by a firing handle touch sensor (a sensor that detects that the firing handle D44 is being operated)} may be counted. After detection by the launch handle touch sensor, counting of the number of entrances is started after entering one of the entrances, and after a certain period of time (or fired), no detection is detected by the launch handle touch sensor. It is also possible to count the number of balls entered until a certain period after a game ball wins.

  A sensor for recognizing the strength of launching a game ball (referred to as a game ball launch strength recognition sensor) recognizes the strength of the strength. When hitting right (launch strength = strong) and when hitting left (launch strength = weak) The game state is determined according to which one of them is executed (non-time shortened game state when left-handed, time-shortened game state when right-handed, etc.), and data corresponding to the determined game state is calculated. It is good as well.

  By opening the door unit D18 on the front (the door open flag is on) and winning a winning opening at the time of invalid winning (for example, entering a big winning opening when a special game is not being executed, etc.) You may comprise so that a maintenance mode may be displayed. To prevent the player from viewing the maintenance mode display when the door unit D18 is opened and the grape jam is eliminated, the maintenance mode display is prevented from being visually recognized by the player. It is supposed to be displayed only in the case of.

  In addition to displaying the total of all winning ratios, it may be configured to display the winning ratio according to the winning opening (first (second) main game start opening, large winning opening, general winning opening) .

  Since all the number of passes and the number of balls entered from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side are sent to each winning mouth and out mouth, the time series of each data is transmitted on the sub control board S side. By displaying the graph, it is possible to confirm the change in the base value, whether or not an illegal game is executed, and the like from the inclination of the graph.

  Information relating to the entry to the display on the main control board M side by the control by the main control board M {entrance state display device J10, auxiliary game symbol display device, first (second) main game symbol display device, etc.} When displaying, it is necessary to expand and display the data for display. However, when a collator is used, the data is directly drawn from the designated RAM and displayed in hexadecimal by the collator. It becomes possible.

  You may comprise so that the number of winnings and the number of payout of each winning opening may be displayed on the display on the main control board M side. In such a configuration, the display contents can be switched by, for example, pressing a RAM clear button. In addition, the maintenance mode can be displayed under conditions that allow the display of a disconnection short circuit error (for example, the connector at the start port is removed), so that the display content of the maintenance mode is not visible to the player. .

  The accumulated number of prize balls may be configured to be displayed on an error display device for errors (for example, 7-segment display) provided on the prize ball payout control board. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm the number of payouts at the time from power-on on the actual machine. Moreover, you may comprise so that a prize ball number (payout number) may be output to an outer end as prize ball information.

  On the main control board M side, the number of passing balls to the out mouth (= number of shot balls), the total number of payouts (total number of payouts), the value for low base calculation (depending on the specific winning mouth in the non-time-saving game state) (Total number of prize balls), high base calculation value (total number of prize balls by a specific winning opening in the time-saving gaming state) is saved, and the main control board M side indicator light It may be used for data display.

  By constantly monitoring the information related to entering, the value for low base calculation {base value, non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game short time flag is off) ) Is calculated from the main control board M side under the condition that, for example, the value for low base calculation / the number of shot balls × 100 (%) is less than a predetermined value. A command may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side and notified by an effect display device or a frame decoration lamp (may be a game effect lamp D26).

  A command may be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side so that the number of passes and the number of prize balls passed to each winning port and out port are all transmitted. Even on the substrate S side, it is possible to execute a display equivalent to or higher than that on the main control substrate M side on the effect display device.

  By controlling the main control board M, data such as the number of winnings is displayed on the main control board M side display device {entry state display device J10, auxiliary game symbol display device, first (second) main game symbol display device}. When displaying, in order not to obstruct the display of the change of the symbol, the display of the symbol, the number of continuous operation of the condition device (the number of consecutive resorts), the state notification at the time of power-on, etc. It is also possible to use a switch or the like on the back side of the panel) to shift to the maintenance mode.

  The game board surface may be formed as an integral molded product so that no game nails are used. Moreover, it is good also as an aspect which continues as the game nail which concerns on a winning opening as a U-shaped nail. In addition, it may be possible to recognize at a glance that the game nail is not displaced from the initial position by providing a marking (for example, a colored stamp) of a size that hides the head of the game nail. .

In addition, the gaming machine in this example may be configured such that the player can display information related to entering a ball. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which a player can display information related to entering a ball will be described in detail below.
(1) Information related to entering the ball is always displayed on the effect display device.
(2) It is possible to arbitrarily select whether or not to display the total number of entered balls during the game by a predetermined operation on the standby demonstration screen (when there is no hold).
(3) When a predetermined operation by the player is executed during the game, the cumulative number of entered balls can be arbitrarily switched to a displayable state.
(4) When a specific effect is executed in a situation where information related to the entry is displayed on the effect display device, the information relating to the entry is not displayed during the execution of the specific effect. (Displayed again after the production ends).
(5) When it is configured to have two effect display devices of the first effect display device and the second effect display device as the effect display device, it is displayed in a part of the display area of the first effect display device. It is possible to switch so that the information related to the incoming ball is displayed on the second effect display device.
You may comprise as mentioned above.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (1)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, where game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter) 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20),
Operatable operation members (for example, sub input button SB, launch handle D44) provided on the front side of the gaming machine,
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entry state display device J10, an effect display device SG),
Games to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). It is comprised so that the entrance state display which is a display based on the entrance state of the sphere can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the entrance state display device J10, the effect display device SG),
In a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied, by performing a predetermined operation on the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB, the firing handle D44), a ball entry state display is displayed. This is a pachinko machine.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (2)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, where game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter) 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20),
Operatable operation members (for example, sub input button SB, launch handle D44) provided on the back side of the gaming machine,
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entry state display device J10, an effect display device SG),
Games to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). It is comprised so that the entrance state display which is a display based on the entrance state of a ball | bowl can be displayed on an information display part (for example, entrance state display apparatus J10),
In a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied, by performing a predetermined operation on the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB, the firing handle D44), a ball entry state display is displayed. This is a pachinko machine.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (3)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, where game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter) 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, an effect display device SG);
A sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) for controlling information display on the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning holes (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port P10, first major winning port C10, second major winning port C20) An entry determination means (for example, entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Control information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for information display executed on the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Control information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving control information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the control information received by the control information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the information display content control means (for example, the information display content control means for controlling the information display content displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). Production display control means SM20),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
As the control information, the plurality of winning ports (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, and the general winning port P10) detected by the pitch determining unit (for example, the ball determining unit MJ10). , Ball detection information, which is information based on the state of the game balls entering the winning holes at the first big winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20), is sent to the side of the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S). Can be sent,
When the secondary game unit (for example, the sub control board S) receives the ball detection information from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M), based on the ball detection information, the plurality of winning holes (for example, , Based on the state of the game balls entering the winning ports at the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the general winning port P10, the first major winning port C10, and the second major winning port C20). The pachinko game is configured to generate the entrance state information as information and display the display based on the generated entrance state information on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG). Machine.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (4)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, where game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter) 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, an effect display device SG);
A sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) for controlling information display on the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning holes (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port P10, first major winning port C10, second major winning port C20) An entry determination means (for example, entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Information based on the entrance of a game ball to the plurality of winning ports (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the general winning port P10) based on the detection result by the ball determining unit (for example, the ball determining unit MJ10). The entry state information generation means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) for generating the entry state information is,
Control information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for information display executed on the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Control information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving control information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, main control board M) side;
Information display content control means for controlling the information display content displayed on the information display section (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the control information received by the control information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). Prepared,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
As the control information, the entry state information can be transmitted to the side of the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
When the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) receives the ball entry state information from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M), the information display unit (for example, the display based on the ball entry state information). The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it can be displayed on the effect display device SG).

Pachinko machines related to this concept (5)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, where game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter) 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entry state display device J10);
A main game part (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning holes (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port P10, first major winning port C10, second major winning port C20) Entry determination means (for example, entry determination means MJ10)
With
Based on the detection result by the entrance determination means (for example, the entrance determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning awards (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first The winning state information which is information based on the state of the game balls entering the winning holes at the big winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) is generated, and the display based on the generated winning state information is displayed as information. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be displayed on a part (for example, a ball entry state display device J10).

Pachinko machines related to this concept (6)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, where game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter) 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) provided on the back side of the gaming machine that controls the progress of the game;
An information display unit (for example, a ball entry state display device J10) attached to the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) and capable of displaying information;
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning holes (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port P10, first major winning port C10, second major winning port C20) Entry determination means (for example, entry determination means MJ10)
With
Based on the detection result by the entrance determination means (for example, the entrance determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning awards (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first The entry state information, which is information based on the entry status of the game balls to the big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) is generated, and the display based on the generated entry state information is displayed on the information display unit (for example, It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be displayed on the entry state display device J10).

Pachinko machines related to this concept (7)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, where game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter) 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, entry state display device J10),
The main game department
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning holes (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port P10, first major winning port C10, second major winning port C20) An entry determination means (for example, entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning holes (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port P10, first major winning port C10, second major winning port C20) Period measuring means (for example, base measurement timer SM32t) capable of measuring the period of monitoring
Based on the detection result detected by the entrance determination means (eg, the entrance determination means MJ10) during the period measured by the period measurement means (eg, the base measurement timer SM32t), the plurality of winning holes (eg, start of the first main game) Entry status information, which is information based on the state of entry of game balls into the mouth A10, the second main game start opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20), is generated. Configured to obtain
The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be able to display a display based on the entry state information on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG, an entry state display device J10).

Pachinko machines related to this concept (8)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, where game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter) 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, an effect display device SG, a ball entry state display device J10);
A launching device (for example, launching device D42) capable of launching a game ball into the game area,
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning holes (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port P10, first major winning port C10, second major winning port C20) An entry determination means (for example, entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Period measurement means (for example, base measurement timer SM32t) capable of measuring the period during which the game ball is being launched by the launch device (eg, launch device D42),
Based on the detection result detected by the entrance determination means (eg, the entrance determination means MJ10) during the period measured by the period measurement means (eg, the base measurement timer SM32t), the plurality of winning holes (eg, start of the first main game) Entry status information, which is information based on the state of entry of game balls into the mouth A10, the second main game start opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20), is generated. Configured to obtain
The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be able to display a display based on the entry state information on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG, an entry state display device J10).

Pachinko machines related to this concept (9)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, where game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter) 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, entry state display device J10),
As the gaming state relating to the ease of entering the predetermined winning opening, the first gaming state and the second gaming state that makes it easier to enter the predetermined winning opening than the first gaming state,
Games to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). It is comprised so that the entrance state display which is a display based on the entrance state of a sphere can be displayed on an information display part (for example, production display device SG, entrance state display device J10),
It is configured that the display state of the entrance state display is different between the case where the entrance state display is displayed in the first game state and the case where the entrance state display is displayed in the second game state. It is a pachinko gaming machine that features it.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (10)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, a first winning port) through which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters the ball Grand Prize Winner C10, Second Grand Prize Winner C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, entry state display device J10),
Detection of game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (for example, main gaming starting port A10, second main gaming starting port B10, general winning port P10, first major winning port C10, second major winning port C20) Possible entry determination means (for example, entry determination means MJ10);
Based on the detection result detected by the entrance determination means (for example, the entrance determination means MJ10), the plurality of prize winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, Entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) for generating entry state information, which is information based on the state of entry of game balls into the first grand prize opening C10 and the second grand prize opening C20) With
A pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to retain the entry status information even after a power failure occurs in a situation where the entry status information is retained, and after returning from the power failure. It is.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (11)
A plurality of winning holes (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a general winning port P10, where game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter) 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20),
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning holes (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port P10, first major winning port C10, second major winning port C20) An entry determination means (for example, entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Based on the detection result detected by the entrance determination means (for example, the entrance determination means MJ10), the plurality of prize winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, Entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) for generating entry state information, which is information based on the state of entry of game balls into the first grand prize opening C10 and the second grand prize opening C20) ,
It has an entry state output terminal (for example, an external terminal) that is an output terminal that can output entry state information,
A pachinko that is configured to output the entrance state information generated by the entrance state information generation means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) at the entrance state output terminal (for example, an external terminal). It is a gaming machine.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entrance judgment means, MJ11-A first main game start entrance entrance judgment means MJ11-B second main game start entrance entrance judgment means, MJ11-H auxiliary game start Entrance prize judging means MJ11-C10 First prize winning entrance entrance judging means, MJ11-C20 Second prize winning entrance entrance judging means MJ11-P General winning entrance entrance judging means, MJ11-C80 Out entrance entrance judging means MJ11-C90 total discharge ball confirmation means, MJ11c-90 total discharge confirmation number counter MJ10b entry related information temporary storage means, MJ12c start entrance ball number counter MJ13c general entry number counter, MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A No. 1 main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-B second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ30 Hold control means MJ31 Hold digest control means, MJ31j Fluctuation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ32 Symbol hold means, MJ32-A First main game symbol hold means MJ32b-A First main game symbol hold information temporary storage means, MJ32-B No. 2 main game symbol holding means MJ32b-B second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-H auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MN game content determining means MN10 winning / losing lottery means, MN11-A first main game win / fail lottery means MN11ta-A first main game win / fail lottery table, MN11-B second main game win / fail lottery means MN11ta-B second main game pass / fail lottery table, MN11-H auxiliary game pass / fail Lottery means MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery table, MN40 Symbol content determination means M N41-A first main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 variation mode determination means, MN51-A first main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B 2 main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B second main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP game progress means MP10 display control means , MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means MP11t-C first and second main game diagram Fluctuation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP20-B Second main game start port motor combination opening / closing control means MP21-B Second main game start port motor combination Object opening / closing condition determination means, MP22t-B second main game start opening electric accessory release timer MP22t2 second main game start opening entrance waiting timer, MP30 special game control means MP31 condition determination means, MP32 special game content determination means MP32ta special Game content reference table, MP33 special game execution means MP33-C 1st and 2nd big prize opening electric accessory opening / closing control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 special game time management means, MP34t special game timer MP34t2 release timer, MP34t3 large Winner entrance ball waiting timer MP50 specific game control means, MP51 certain change End condition determining means MP52 Short time end condition determining means, MP52c Short time counter MB Game state temporary storage means, MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C First and second main game symbol information temporary storage Means, MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means, MB20b special game related information temporary storage means MB30b specific game related information temporary storage means, MO maintenance mode control means ME fraud detection information management means , MEb fraud related information temporary storage means MT information transmission control means, MT10 command transmission buffer MG external signal output control means, MH prize ball payout determination means MHsj payout information transmission / reception means, MHsjb payout command temporary storage means MHc prize ball number counter, MHb Unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start opening A11s 1st main game start entrance entrance detection device, A11s2 1st main game start entrance confirmation sensor A20 1st main game design display device, A21g 1st main game design Display unit A21h First main game symbol hold display unit, B second main game peripheral device B10 second main game start port, B11s second main game start port entrance detection device B11d second main game start port electric accessory, B20 Second main game symbol display device B21g Second main game symbol display unit, B21h Second main game symbol hold display unit C First / second main game shared peripheral device, C10 First big prize port C11s First big prize port prize Detecting device, C11d 1st grand prize opening electric accessory C20 2nd big prize opening, C21s 2nd big prize opening winning detection device C21d 2nd big prize opening electric accessory, P10 General winning opening P11s General winning entry entrance detecting device , J10 Entry state display device C80 Out mouth, C80s Out mouth entrance detection device C90s Total discharge confirmation sensor H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port entrance detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decoration symbol display control means SM21n drawing display content determination means, SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21b drawing related information temporary storage means , SM21t drawing variation time management timer SM22 drawing hold information display control means, SM22b drawing hold information temporary storage means SM23 background effect display control means, SM23n background effect display content determination means SM23b background effect related information temporary storage means, SM24 Effect display control means SM24n notice effect display content determining means, SM24b notice effect related information temporary storage means SM25 reach effect display control means, SM25n reach effect display content determining means SM25b reach effect related information temporary storage means, SM30 error Notification control means SM31 Error occurrence determination means, SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS Production display means (sub-sub control section), SS10 Sub information transmission / reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Production display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decoration symbol display area, SG12 First hold display section SG13 Second hold display section SB Sub input button, SBs Sub input button input detection device KH Prize ball payout control board, KE Prize ball payout device MHc-2 Normal prize Ball counter, SM32 Maintenance mode display control means MJ11c-C91 Normal total discharge confirmation number counter, MJ11c-C92 Total discharge maintenance counter MHc-3 Prize ball maintenance counter, SN10c Sub side normal prize ball number counter SJ10c Sub side total discharge confirmation Several cows , SM32t base measurement timer SJ11c Sub-side start-entrance ball number counter, SJ13c Sub-side general ball number counter SRc RAM clear count counter, MHc-4 Non-use counter MHc-5 Play counter, MHc-6 Continuous hand Counter

Claims (1)

A plurality of winning entrances through which game balls can be entered and prize balls are paid out when game balls enter;
An information display unit capable of displaying information,
A ball entry judging means capable of detecting a game ball entering the plurality of winning holes;
Based on the detection result detected by the entrance determination means, the entrance state information generating means for generating entrance state information that is information based on the entrance state of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes,
A pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to retain the entry status information even after a power failure occurs in a situation where the entry status information is retained, and after returning from the power failure. .

Images